JP7180660B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning hole and a starting winning is detected while a variable display (variable effect) of symbols and the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , with a predetermined number as the upper limit, there is a variable effect related to the start winning is suspended. When the variable effect being executed ends, execution of the variable effect related to the starting prize detected first among the suspended non-executed variable effects is started (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340046

When the variable performance is suspended, there is a possibility that the suspended variable performance includes a winning variable performance . There is a desire among the players to grasp the pending information related to the variable performance at an appropriate timing for the player .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preferably notifying information relating to dynamic display of reserved identification information .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is established, and determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means, wherein the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means When predetermined identification information appears, a predetermined game value is given to the player, and a predetermined number of pieces of information is obtained until the information obtained by the obtaining means is used for determination by the determining means. storage means for storing an upper limit; and identification information dynamics in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Judgment means for judging whether or not there is a target display, operation means that can be operated by the player, detection means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the above detection means. an informing means capable of informing, when it is detected that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, based on the determination result of the determining means while the operation is being performed; and at least the operation is being performed. and means for changing a color displayed in a predetermined area of the display means as the notification by the notification means executed between .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is established, determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination result by the determination means. dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of the identification information based on the dynamic display execution means, wherein predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means storage means for giving a predetermined game value to the player when the information is obtained, and for storing the information obtained by the obtaining means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit at least until the information is used for the determination by the determination means; whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means; an operation means that can be operated by the player; a detection means that detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; an informing means capable of informing based on the determination result of the judging means while the operation is detected when the operation is detected; and the informing executed at least while the operation is being performed. Since means for changing the color displayed in the predetermined area of the display means is provided as the notification by the means, there is an effect that the information related to the dynamic display of the reserved identification information can be suitably notified.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a pending|holding ball storage area, and a pending|holding ball execution area. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, and (c) is the number of balls held is 2 (d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for big hits in the case of , and (d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a (normal) variation pattern table for losing when the number of held balls is 2 and (e) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table when the number of held balls is two. It is the figure which showed the structure of the prefetch information storage area typically. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a fluctuation effect notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device. . 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the additional data table typically. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing variation processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; Fig. 4 is a flow chart showing announcing processing performed by the MPU in the audible lamp controller; (a) is a flowchart showing notification button determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing notification execution determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is a flow chart. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a ball hitting stop determination process executed by an MPU in the sound ramp control device; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing notification display setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; (a) is a flowchart showing notification stop determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing notification button invalidation cancellation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flow chart. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, (c) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a pending ball number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a confirmation command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. and (c) is a flowchart showing a demonstration command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot notification command process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a variable time notification command process executed by an MPU in a display control device. and (c) is a flowchart showing notification stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing part of display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing part of display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing pending image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot notification image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is. (a) is a flowchart showing a variable time notification image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification image deletion process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flow chart. 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front. A notification button 23 is provided on the right side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the content of the so-called super ready-to-win effect, which is one aspect of the variable effect.

The variable effect is a effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as will be described later, the ball fired to the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning hole (first ball entrance 64 to be described later). See Figure 2.) is executed when the ball is entered (starting winning), and after the symbol (the third symbol described later) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed will cause the starting winning. This is an effect for presenting the result of the lottery (whether it is a big hit or not) to the player.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. One stage is provided. Various effects, such as the variable effects described above and the ready-to-win effects executed during the variable effects, are designed to be performed according to the themes given to each stage.

The stage is changed when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during a high-speed change in which the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed change invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is repeatedly changed in the order of "town stage"→"empty stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

Further, when the normal ready-to-win effect is started in the variable effect performed by the third pattern display device 81, when the normal ready-to-win is developed into the super ready-to-win, the selection screen of the super ready-to-win` effect mode during the normal ready-to-win is displayed as the third pattern. It is configured to be displayed on the display device 81 .

On the selection screen, a plurality of effect mode candidates that can be selected as the super ready-to-win effect mode are displayed, and one of the effect mode candidates is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect mode candidate is changed. Then, the performance mode of super ready-to-win is determined based on the performance mode candidate selected when developing to super ready-to-win, and super ready-to-win is executed by the third pattern display device 81 according to the performance mode.

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. , rearward, rightward and leftward). Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the super ready-to-win production mode may be selected.

The notification button 23 is a push operation type button, and when the push operation is continued for a predetermined time (1 second in this embodiment), a variation that becomes a big hit in the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held. This is a button for notifying the player of the fact that there is an effect.

Although the details will be described later, when the pachinko machine 10 detects a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) while the third symbol display device 81 is executing a variable effect, The variable effect is suspended up to a predetermined number (4 in the pachinko machine 10) as an upper limit. Then, when the variable performance being executed ends, the execution of the variable performance suspended first is started. At the start of this execution, a lottery is made as to whether or not a big win will be achieved in the variable performance.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that whether or not the suspended variable performance results in a big win can be read ahead and determined before the start of the variable performance. Then, when the notification button 23 is continuously pressed by the player for a predetermined time (1 second), based on the result of the lottery performed for the variable effect being executed and the judgment result by prefetching, it is being executed. It is determined whether or not there is a variation performance that will result in a big win among the variation performances and the pending variation performances, and if there is a variation performance that will result in a big win, a notice to that effect is made.

As a result, when the player wants to stop the game and leave the seat, or when he/she wants to complete a task such as a call or an e-mail using a mobile phone, he/she can press the notification button 23 continuously for a predetermined period of time to indicate that the game is being executed. It is possible to know whether or not there is a variation performance that will be a big hit in the variation performance and the pending variation performance.

Therefore, the player can decide to immediately stop the game in order to leave the seat or complete the task if there is no variable effect that will result in a big win. In addition, if there is a variable performance that results in a big win, the player can decide to continue the game until a big win is achieved. In other words, with this notice button 23, when the player wants to leave the room or finish his/her business, it can be determined whether or not the action can be executed immediately.

Further, in the present embodiment, unless the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (one second), it is determined whether or not there is a variable effect that will result in a big win among the variable effects being executed and the variable effects being held. not notified. Unless there are special circumstances, such as when you want to stop the game and leave the seat, or when you want to finish a call or e-mail on a mobile phone, etc. If it is known whether or not one of them will result in a big win before the pending variable performance is executed, the enjoyment of the game is conversely deprived.

In this embodiment, it is notified whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win among the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held only when the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second). When the player unintentionally touches the notification button 23, if the touched time is less than a predetermined time, a big win is included in either the variable performance being executed or the variable performance being held. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the game will be played.

Note that a notification method when the notification button 23 is pressed will be described later with reference to FIG.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (see FIG. ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first A ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball receiving port 64, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and screwed from the front side of the game board 13 by wood screws. etc. is fixed. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

A plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a variable is in progress accompanying a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) by a lighting state, or perform a variable display after the variable is completed. , the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning is indicated by the lighting state, and the ball (holding ball) that has not been changed among the balls entered in the first ball entrance 64 The number of held balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the emitted colors.

In the pachinko machine 10, whether a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64 is a big hit or not is determined (big win lottery), and when it is determined to be a big win, the type of the big win is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared.

The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, but also indicates whether or not the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation executed with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. , a pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot is shown.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “2R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and a short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). .

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of the subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change, probability change state), in other words, transition to a special game state It is a game state that is easy to play. The high-probability state (during variable probability, variable probability state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later is increased and the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 .

On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to the time when the probability is not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, the state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased. It means a game state in which a ball is likely to enter 64.

Instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 or It is also possible to change the number of times that is opened. Specifically, in the time saving state, the time for the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 to open is longer than in the case other than the time saving state, or the number of times the electric accessory opens per time You may make it more than a case other than a time saving state. Also, in the time-saving state, at least two of increasing the winning probability of the second symbol, lengthening the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times of opening the electric accessory may be performed at the same time. good.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first pattern display device 37, variable display of the third pattern (variable effect) is performed. and a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs A second pattern display device 83 is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later. are displayed.

Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is A decorative display is made according to the situation. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) to be described later is a big win, a variable display (variable effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, It is configured such that a big win occurs after the variable display is finished. When shifting to a high probability state (probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to "high probability symbols") to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when shifting to a low-probability state after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to "low-probability symbols") to which even numbers are added are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds is the main display area in which the third symbol is variably displayed (variable effect). Dm and the other upper 1/3 are sub-display areas Ds for displaying an announcement effect, characters, and the like. In addition, in the central part of the lower base side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a reserved ball number display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls is provided.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3. The symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2. A symbol row Z3 is displayed in Dm3.

The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third pattern is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The number of held balls display area Db is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which the variable display (variation effect) has not been performed among the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64. be.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, moving images are displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or usually a black boy. A notice effect is performed by changing the color of the hair, the color of the usually white headband, and the appearance of another character.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable effect (variable display) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters is Holds up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37, and is also indicated in the number of reserved balls display area Db. In the reserved ball number display area Db, one reserved ball number pattern ("●" pattern) is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. .

That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved ball numbers is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, the reserved ball number pattern is displayed. Indicates that the number of balls is 4 balls. Further, when the number of reserved balls pattern is not displayed in the number of reserved balls display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the number of reserved balls does not exist.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to four. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved number of balls display area Db, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four is displayed for the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 provides a variable display that alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of "○"), the first ball entrance 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time. is configured to

The number of times the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37, and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 . Then, the number of reservations is displayed according to the number of the second symbol reservation lamps 84 lit.

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in the present embodiment. A part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64, the maximum number of held balls passing through the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, but may be three times or less, or five times or more (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A large winning lottery is drawn by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5), and the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37, and the variation of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81. A performance is performed. The first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

The first ball entrance 64 is provided with an electric accessory having two blades covering an opening through which a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 . The electric accessory opens and closes the two blades to open the first ball entrance 64 (enlarged state) or close it (reduced state). In normal times, the first ball entrance 64 is in a closed state in which the wings of the electric accessory are closed (the wings stand up), and the ball cannot enter the first ball entrance 64, or It is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol "O", the electric accessory of the first ball entrance 64 is operated for a predetermined period of time. From the state in which the wings of the electric accessory stand up while the electric accessory is being operated. It will be in a state of being movable in a substantially V shape (inverted V shape), and the first ball entrance 64 will be in an open state. When the first ball entrance 64 is in the open state, the ball can enter the first ball entrance 64, or the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 compared to the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, when the symbol “O” stops and wins, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is possible to make a state in which many big winning lotteries can be performed by entering a ball.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular special prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery by the main controller 110 becomes a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win stops after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. A stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Second entrances 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. A through-hole (not shown) through which a ball passes is vertically provided in the second ball inlet 67 . When the ball launched into the game area passes through the second ball entrance 67, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 Then, a winning lottery for the second symbol (also called normal symbol) is performed.

As a result of the lottery of the second pattern (normal pattern) performed for the ball passing through the second ball entrance 67, when it is determined to be a hit, the second pattern display device 83 fluctuates and displays the second pattern. After the "O" symbol is stopped and displayed through , the electric accessory of the first ball entrance 64 is activated. As a result, the wings of the electric accessory, which make it difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, are moved from a substantially vertical upright state to a substantially V shape (inverted V shape) for a predetermined period of time. A state in which a ball can enter the first ball entrance 64 or a state in which a ball can easily enter compared to the closed state is established.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control unit 110 controls the main operations of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting of a jackpot lottery, variable display (variable effect) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display results in the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, and a fluctuation pattern table 202d. Main controller 110 executes the main control described above by various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are mainly used to set the jackpot lottery, the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83. It is used in MPU 201 of control device 110 . Further, in the description of various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIG.

For the setting of the big winning lottery and the variable display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the big winning lottery and the second winning symbol used for selecting the big winning symbol are used. A per type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. .

Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 20). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 899), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (eg, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. The random number counter C1 is updated.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 20).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 is stored in any one of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number for the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the value of the random number that will be a big hit, it will be determined as a big hit.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 7(a). FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. A jackpot random number table 202a is for a low probability state used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (a period in which the probability is not variable), and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot from the low probability state. It is divided into two types, one for high probability state used in the case of high probability state (during probability change) with high probability. The number of random numbers to be the big wins included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 899. FIG. In the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become a big win in the low probability state is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the big winning random number table 202a. ing.

On the other hand, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become a big hit in the case of a high probability state is 30, and the values are 28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322 , 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot random numbers for the low-probability state and the jackpot random numbers for the high-probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are not duplicated. have set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so there is a possibility that the jackpot will be illegally awarded. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that becomes a big win, Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value, fraud can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when it becomes a jackpot. In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in the same reservation area as the reservation area where the first hit random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth reservation areas provided in the reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in one reservation area in the reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that becomes an outlier, the variation pattern in the variation effect Also, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a big win, the variation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect will be those at the time of the big win. . In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM202. Here, with reference to FIG.7(b), the jackpot classification table 202b is demonstrated. FIG.7(b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table 202b. As shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot types and the values of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, "15R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and 100 There is a "15R normal jackpot" that is a time-saving state during the number of fluctuations, and a "2R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds hits two rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 7(b), the value of the first per type counter C2 "0 to 39" is associated with the 15R probability variable jackpot, and the value of the first per type counter C2 "40 to 39" is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79” is associated, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 “80 to 99” is associated with the 2R probability variable jackpot.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value for a big win, the big winning type associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area is determined from the big winning type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and the 2R variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . The probability that each jackpot type is selected when a jackpot is won is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the jackpot type table defines the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type.

In addition, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each game state is prepared, and in each jackpot type table, the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. There are three stops: "Reach out of front and back" that stops at the same time, "Reach other than front and rear out" in which the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs, and "Complete out of reach" that does not occur ( production) pattern is selected.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in the same reservation area as the reservation area in which the first hit random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth reservation areas provided in the reservation ball storage area 203b.

The ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of stop pattern tables 202c having different ranges of random numbers for selecting the stop type, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, the stop pattern table 202c with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is selected so that the ready-to-win effect is not selected unnecessarily because the jackpot is likely to occur. This makes it easier for people to choose “completely out”. In this stop pattern table 202c, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-rear reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-rear reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-rear reach". Become.

In addition, in the low probability state, the stop pattern table has a narrow random number range of 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. 202c is selected, making it difficult to select "completely out". In this stop pattern table 202c, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, and "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is more likely to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter stop pattern table 202c as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 20).

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines the variation pattern by the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM202. Determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. The voice ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine pattern of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 A variation mode is determined, and the presence or absence of execution of the notice performance and the execution mode of the notice performance are determined.

Details of the variation pattern table 202d will now be described with reference to FIGS. 7(c) to 7(e). The pachinko machine 10 is provided with, as the variation pattern table 202d, a big win variation pattern table 202d1 used at the time of the big win and loss variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 used at the time of the loss. In addition, as the deviation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3, depending on whether the game state is a high probability state at the time of the time saving state or the probability change, or a low probability state at the normal time excluding the time saving state, for the loss (probability change) A fluctuation pattern table 202d3 and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 are prepared.

Furthermore, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 203d3 includes a table to be referred to when the number of held balls is 0 (that is, when there is no held ball), a table to be referred to when the number of held balls is 1, A table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3, and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 4 are separately provided.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to prepare a variation pattern table for each number of reserved balls as in the present embodiment. may be provided. For example, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 203d3 may be divided into a table that is referenced when the number of held balls is less than 3 and a table that is referenced when the number of held balls is 3 or more. . Further, the condition of the number of reserved balls for determining the table to be referred to may be different in each of the fluctuation pattern tables 202d1 to 203d3. For example, the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 includes a table to be referred to when the number of retained balls is less than 3 and a table to be referred to when the number of retained balls is 3 or more. A different table 202d2 may be prepared for each number of held balls, and a single table may be prepared for the variation pattern table 202d3 for loss (probability variation) regardless of the number of held balls.

FIG. 7(c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big-hit variation pattern table 202d1 that is referenced when the number of held balls is 2, among the big-hit variation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

The big-hit variation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups (groups) based on the big-hit type regardless of the number of held balls. Specifically, as a jackpot type, it is divided into a 15R jackpot common that is referred to when a 15R variable jackpot and a 15R normal jackpot is determined, and a dedicated 2R variable jackpot that is referred to when a 2R variable jackpot is determined. there is A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value (big winning random value) that becomes a big hit, the variation pattern according to the big winning type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area. Determines the group (group) to be referred to in the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. In the group (group) of the big win variation pattern table 202d1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in the reservation area. be done.

In common with the 15R jackpot, three variation patterns, variation A with a variation time of 30 seconds, variation B with a variation time of 60 seconds, and variation C with a variation time of 90 seconds, are selectable, and each variation pattern is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The variation A is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 executes a so-called normal reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach with a short variation time. The variation B is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 performs a so-called super reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach having a longer variation time than the normal reach. Super reach includes, for example, reach that develops from normal reach, as well as long reach that simply takes a long time to reach. The variation C is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 executes a so-called special reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach having a longer variation time than the super reach. The special reach includes, for example, a reach that develops further after the super reach, and a special reach that develops from the normal reach different from the super reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 7(c), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of pending balls is 2 is 0 to 10 for variation A, variation 11 to 99 for B, and 100 to 198 for variation C. Since the 15R jackpot common table is selected in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot, it is easy to select the variation C in which the special reach is executed in order to give the player a sense of expectation. It's becoming However, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any reach by structuring such that variation A in which normal reach is performed and variation B in which super reach is performed are also selected.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a large number of different effects are prepared for each reach. The image displayed on the back side of the character) is rapidly changed and displayed, and a certain character is suddenly displayed. Includes multiple reach with different production contents, such as those with is added. In the main control unit 110, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, only the fluctuation A, the fluctuation B, and the fluctuation C are determined as fluctuation patterns, and the sound ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 control each fluctuation A to A detailed variation pattern corresponding to C is determined. According to the detailed variation pattern, the third symbol display device 91 executes a variation effect.

Only the "2R fluctuation" fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 59 seconds is selectably prepared exclusively for the 2R probability variable jackpot. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, even if it corresponds to any number of pending balls, in the group dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 0 to 198) are associated with 2R variations. That is, when the jackpot variation type is the 2R probability variable jackpot, the 2R variation is always selected as the variation pattern.

When the 2R variation is selected by the main controller 110, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation is determined by the sound ramp controller 113 and the display controller 114. FIG. Therefore, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined as the jackpot type in the main controller 110, the third symbol display device 81 executes a fluctuation effect according to a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the 2R fluctuation. In the pachinko machine 10, characters such as "chicken" or "girl" are displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81 as detailed variation patterns corresponding to the 2R variation, and finally A variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol, and a variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a particular symbol with the lighting or blinking of a particular lamp are included.

Although the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect that foretells the start of a jackpot or a ready-to-win effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another variation type counter, and when the reach is established, the last It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the third symbol to be stopped is to be shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is shifted before and after, etc.).

Also, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, a group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot is provided, but in the pachinko machine 10, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is achieved, only the "2R variation" variation pattern is selected. Without providing a group dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 may define only the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved. In this case, when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the 2R fluctuation may be determined as the fluctuation pattern without referring to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, only "2R variation" is selected when a 2R probability variable jackpot is achieved, but one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns when a 2R probability variable jackpot is achieved. You may do so. In this case, like the group common to the 15R jackpot, even in the group dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern selected when the 2R probability variable jackpot occurs, and a certain reservation area The variation pattern associated with the stored value of the variation type counter CS1 may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in the reservation area.

FIG. 7D schematically shows an example of a failure (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 that is referenced when the number of held balls is 2, out of the failure (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. It is a diagram showing.

As shown in FIG. 7(d), the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is dedicated to complete deviation, which is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, and forward-backward deviation reach and forward-backward deviation. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach is determined and the stop type at the time of loss, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. is attached.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in a certain reservation area is not a value for a big win (random value for a big win), that is, when it is a value that becomes an outlier, the game state is normal except for the time-saving state. When in the low probability state, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserve area according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area as the first hit random number counter C1. A variation pattern corresponding to the value of is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

Two variation patterns, a variation D with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation E with a variation time of 10 seconds, are selectable for the complete outlier, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each variation pattern. are mapped. When the variation D or the variation E is selected as the variation pattern, the third symbol variation device 81 executes a variation performance of stopping and displaying without reaching reach after the high speed variation of the third symbol is started. As shown in FIG. 7(d), in the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence between each variation dedicated to complete loss and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of held balls is 2 is as follows: 0 to 98, and the variation E is 99 to 198.

In addition, in common to reach, there are three variations A to C described above, that is, variation A in which normal reach is executed by the third symbol variation device 81 with a variation time of 30 seconds, and super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds. Three variation patterns, variation B executed by the 3-symbol display device 81 and variation C executed by the 3-symbol display device 81 with a variation time of 90 seconds, are prepared so as to be selectable. In the outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence between each fluctuation common to the reach when the number of held balls is 2 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for fluctuation A and 99 to 190 for fluctuation B. , the variation C is 191-198.

FIG. 7(e) schematically shows an example of the loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 that is referenced when the number of held balls is 2, out of the loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 stored in the ROM 202. It is a diagram showing.

As shown in FIG. 7(e), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation in the same manner as the deviation (normal) variation pattern table. Fluctuation D and variation E can be selected as a variation pattern only for complete deviation, and refer to when reach other than front and rear deviation reach and front and rear deviation reach is determined, and fluctuations A to C can be selected as variation patterns Reach common, It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type at the time of deviation, and in the divided groups, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each selectable fluctuation pattern.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in a certain reservation area is a value that does not result in a big win, that is, a value that is out of the game, when the game state is in the time-saving state or the high-probability state at the time of probability variation, According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern. Determined from table 202d3.

As shown in FIG. 7(e), in the loss (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the correspondence between each variation exclusively for complete loss when the number of held balls is 2 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is as follows: 0 to 190, and the variation E is 191 to 198. In addition, when the number of held balls is 2, the correspondence between each variation in common reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A, 99 to 190 for variation B, and 191 to 198 for variation C. ing. In other words, the correspondence between each variation common to reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same between the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3.

On the other hand, when the game state is in the time-saving state or the high-probability state at the time of probability variation, the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64, and there are many complete misses (variation E) with a long variation time. When executed, it takes a long time to start the next variable display, and the player may be put in a waiting state and feel uncomfortable. Moreover, it is not preferable for the hall because the operating rate is lowered.

Therefore, if the game state is completely out when it is in a time-saving state or a high-probability state at the time of probability variation, it is a complete outage with a shorter fluctuation time than when it is in another game state (normal state except for time-saving state) ( In order to facilitate the selection of variation D), a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and a deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 are configured. As a result, by starting the next variable display early, it is possible to reduce the possibility of making the player feel uncomfortable. Moreover, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

Although the variation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters (selecting whether or not to display an advance notice, etc.). In addition, the selection of the type of loss is configured to be divided into a (normal) variation pattern table for loss and a (probability variation) variation pattern table for loss, but even if the game state is normal, there are multiple held balls (for example , 3 or more if the maximum is 4), since the variation display may be ended early, the selection may be made by referring to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table.

In addition, since the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is the front-rear out-of-reach reach or the front-rear out-of-rear reach and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the game state, Normal) The fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 do not include a group common to reach, and these fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referred to only when the stop type is completely off. In addition, a variation pattern table may be separately prepared which is referred to when the stop type is either the front-rear out-of-order reach or the non-rear-out-of-rear reach regardless of the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is the out-of-order reach or the non-out-of-order reach and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the gaming state. Although it is assumed that there is, it may be different depending on the game state.

Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 for each deviation shown in FIGS. In this case, another table may be referenced to select variation D and variation E with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, tables corresponding to the number of held balls may be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 6, the second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within the range of 0 to 250 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 67. obtained when There are 149 random numbers to be won, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that a winning is occurring, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a "○" symbol as a stop symbol (second symbol). Along with the lighting display, the electric accessory of the first ball entrance 64 is operated, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14). It is updated and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 20).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of (fluctuation effect) and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I/O buffer. and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 20) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 19) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

The RAM 203 further has at least a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, and a reserved ball execution area 203c.

The number of held balls counter 203a counts the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 (hereinafter referred to as "start winning") detected in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. ) based on the variable display performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81). Zero is set as an initial value of the reserved ball number counter 203a by the initial setting process (S613 in FIG. 19) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S203 in FIG. 15). On the other hand, the number of pending balls counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variable effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 16).

The value of the pending ball number counter 203a (that is, the pending ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the pending ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 15). The pending ball count command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the pending ball counter 203a is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of pending balls of the variable effect that is held by the main controller 110 by the number of pending balls command. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the suspension count of the variable effect without accessing the main control device 110. FIG. In addition, every time the start winning is detected, by transmitting a pending ball number command from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp control device 113, the pending ball number of the variable effect managed in the voice ramp control device 113 is reduced to noise. Even if the actual number of retained balls of the variable performance retained by the main controller 110 is deviated due to such influences, the deviation can be corrected by the command of the number of retained balls to be received next.

The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved ball number to the display control device 114 each time the internally managed reserved ball number changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the reserved ball number display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in this embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits a pending ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, in the pending ball number command, not only the value of the pending ball number counter 203a incremented by 1 , the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in accordance with the start winning that triggered the addition of the pending ball number counter 203a. C3, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is also included.

That is, when there is a starting prize, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 , is communicated to the audio ramp controller 113 by the number of pending pitches command.

In the voice ramp control device 113, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the pending ball number command is changed based on each value. Pre-reading is performed before the performance is executed, and what the variable performance will be (whether or not a big hit will occur, how the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable performance. Then, based on the judgment result by the look-ahead, the execution of various effects is determined, and when the notification button 23 is pressed, there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit among the variable effects being executed and the variable effects being held. It is possible to notify whether or not there is.

The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) upon detection of the start winning. A memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are retrieved from the counter buffer. It is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area 203b is divided into four reserved areas (first reserved to first 4 areas) (see FIG. 6).

The reserved ball execution area 203c stores data (counters C1 to C3, CS1 each value).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the big winning lottery and the setting of the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the above-described reserved ball storage area 203b (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1), the data corresponding to one starting prize is stored in this reserved ball execution area 203c. shift to It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to set the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. used by

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variation effect) of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit random number counter C1 used for determining the jackpot type are used. A hit type symbol counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the stop type at the time of loss, and a variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning).

The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each of the four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas) has a first winning random number counter storage area 203b1 that stores the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type counter C2 that stores the value. A per type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

In this embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, and 203b4 may be provided in one of the reserved ball storage areas.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is stored. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas). . That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest starting prize is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest starting prize.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In this reserved ball execution area 203c, similarly to the reserved ball storage area 203b, a first winning random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the value of the first winning type counter C2 are stored. A first hit type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the first reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored in this reserved ball. It shifts to each area 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 17), and a big winning lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the random value in the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the first reservation area is transferred to the first hit random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reservation ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number in the first winning type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first winning type counter storage area 203c2, and the random number in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. , the random number in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4.

When the shift of the data to the holding ball execution area 203c is completed, the holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203b stores (holds). Shift processing is performed to pack the data into areas (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the pending ball storage area 203b. do. In this state, the data in the first reserved area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c, and when the first reserved area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth) to the area Shift to area (1st to 3rd) with number 1 smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

Further, for example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the second pending area to the first pending area. , to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. can reduce the control burden.

Note that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (retained) in the reserving areas (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, changes production and continuous It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 425 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the notification button 23, various switches 208, and the like. The various switches 208 are also connected to the main controller 110, and include a general prize winning opening switch for detecting a ball entering the general winning opening 63 shown in FIG. A first ball entry switch to be detected, a specific prize entry switch to detect a ball entering the specific prize entry 65a of the variable prize winning device 65, and a ball guided to the ball discharge path through the out port 66 is detected. The output signal of each switch is input to the input/output port of the audio lamp controller 113 .

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or super reach. It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the effect mode of the hour.

When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than changing the stage, such as changing the performance mode of super ready-to-win, a frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third pattern display device 81 by receiving the frame button operation command.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the operation status of the notification button 23, and when it is determined that the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for one second, the variable effect being executed and the variable effect being held It is judged by pre-reading processing whether or not there is a variation performance that becomes a big hit in the game. Then, when there is a variable effect that becomes a big win among these variable effects, a big win notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114.例文帳に追加Thereby, it is possible to display an image indicating that a big win is included in the third symbol display device 81 .

The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a fluctuation pattern table 222d as fixed value data in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221. ing. These tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202c, and variation pattern table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 201.

The sound lamp control device 113 acquires from the counter buffer in accordance with the start winning in the main control device 110 and transmits the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 by the reserved ball number command. , Based on each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the fluctuation pattern table 222d, prefetch processing is executed.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, what kind of performance will result from the pending variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead processing (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variable time, etc.) When the execution of various performances is determined by making a decision before the execution of , or when the notification button 23 is pressed down, there is a variation performance that becomes a big hit among the variation performances being executed and the variation performances being held. Execute control to notify whether or not.

The RAM 223 includes a pending ball number counter 223a, a prefetch information storage area 223b, a notification button ON counter 223c, a notification execution flag 223d, a notification execution counter 223e, a ball undetected counter 223f, a ball launch stop flag 223g, a notification button invalid flag 223h, At least a fixed command flag 223i is provided.

The reserved ball number counter 223a, like the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable effect that is being held in the device 110 .

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the pending ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 . Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of pending balls based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and manages the number of pending balls by the pending ball number counter 223a. .

Specifically, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of pending balls of the variable effect is added, and the value of the pending ball counter 203a is added in the main controller 110. When the command for the number of held balls sent from the main controller 110 is received, the value after the addition of the number of held balls counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the command for the number of held balls (that is, the value held by the main controller 110 The number of pending balls of the variable effect that has been performed) is stored in the pending ball number counter 223a (see S1007 in FIG. 23).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the pending ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and upon receipt thereof, the third symbol When the mode of the variable effect in the display device 81 is set, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pending ball number counter 223a (see S1108 in FIG. 24). In this way, in accordance with the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the pending ball number counter 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the pending ball number counter 223a. While synchronizing with the number counter 203a, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a can be updated.

The value of the number of reserved balls counter 223a is used to display the number of reserved balls symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command in the reserved ball number counter 223a, and in response to reception of the variation pattern command, stores the reserved ball number counter 223a. is updated, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the stored or updated value of the reserved ball counter 223a.

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the pending ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the pending ball number pattern. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the reserved ball count display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (see S1951 in FIG. 37(a)).

As described above, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball symbols displayed in the pending ball number display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the pending ball counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to accurately display the number of held balls for which the variable effect is held.

The look-ahead information storage area 223b stores information for performing look-ahead processing, that is, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit random number counter C1, which is acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110 and transmitted by the pending ball number command. This is an area for storing the values of the winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1. The sound ramp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to execute prefetch processing.

Details of the prefetch information storage area 223b will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223b. The look-ahead information storage area 223b has five areas of look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas. In each look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas, a first winning random number counter storage area 223b1 in which the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is stored, and a first winning type in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is stored At least a counter storage area 223b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223b3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223b4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

The look-ahead information 0th area is an area for storing the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effect currently being executed. Also, the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information are areas for storing the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to maximum four reserved variable effects. Specifically, the first area of the look-ahead information is an area corresponding to the first suspended variable performance in terms of time among the suspended variable performances, and the second area of the look-ahead information is the area of the suspended variable performance. Of these, the area corresponds to the second oldest suspended variable performance in terms of time, and the look-ahead information third area is the area corresponding to the third oldest suspended variable performance in terms of time among the suspended variable performances. , and the look-ahead information fourth area is an area corresponding to the temporally fourth oldest suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances.

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball count command from the main control device 110, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are held. Extract from the number of balls command. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the random numbers of the areas corresponding to the number of pending balls included in the command for the number of pending balls among the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information. Stored in the counter storage area 223b1, the first winning type counter storage area 223b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223b3, and the variation type counter storage area 223b4.

Specifically, if the number of pending balls included in the pending ball number command is X (1 ≤ N ≤ 4), the number of variable effects suspended at that time is N, and the pending ball count command Since the values of the included counters C1 to C3 and CS1 correspond to the X-th suspended variable performance in terms of time among the suspended variable performances, each counter storage area 223b1 of the look-ahead information X area. Stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to .about.b4. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number of reserved balls command in the X reserved area of the number of reserved balls storage area 203b. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reservation X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the look-ahead information X area.

On the other hand, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which means the start of the variation effect, it performs shift processing in each area of the look-ahead information storage area 223b. That is, the suspended variable performance is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance suspended first in terms of time is started, so each of the look-ahead information first areas corresponding to the first suspended variable performance The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the look-ahead information 0th area corresponding to the variable effect currently being executed.

Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the prefetch information second area are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the prefetch information first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the 3 areas are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the second look-ahead information area, and the counters of the look-ahead information fourth area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the look-ahead information third area.

As a result, the same values as those of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c of the main controller 110 are stored in the lookahead information 0th area. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored in the areas. That is, in the sound ramp control device 113, each counter C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variable effect withheld by the main control device 110 is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b.

The sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of suspended variable effects (the number of suspended balls) from the suspended ball number counter 223a when performing the look-ahead processing. Then, based on the number of pending balls, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the areas where the variable performance is suspended among the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information are read in advance, and the big hit is made in the variable performance. It is determined whether or not, the variation time, and the like. For example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is "1", the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is 1 ball, so the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored only for the first area of the look-ahead information is read ahead and a judgment is made. Further, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is "4", the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is 4 balls, so the respective counters C1 to C3 stored for each of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information , CS1 are read in advance to determine.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp controller 113, and the voice ramp controller 113 accesses the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the like. can't. On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a look-ahead information storage area 223b, and the sound lamp control device 113 also stores counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects withheld by the main control device 110. Therefore, by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b, the prefetch process can be executed by the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. That is, when the suspended variable performance is executed, the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed, Execution of various performances is determined, and when a notification button 23 is pressed down, it is notified whether or not there is a variable performance to be a big hit among the variable performances being executed and the variable performances being held. Control can be implemented in the audio ramp control process.

It should be noted that the above-described shift processing in the look-ahead information storage area 223b is based on the number of pending balls when the variation pattern command is received (the value of the pending ball number counter 223a before being updated based on the reception of the variation pattern command). , data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the suspended variable effect among the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information.

For example, the value of the pending ball number counter 223a before updating when the variation pattern command is received is "4", and data is stored in all areas of the lookahead information storage area 223b (lookahead information first to fourth areas). Suppose you are In this case, the data in the prefetch information first area is shifted to the prefetch information 0 area, the data in the prefetch information second area is shifted to the prefetch information first area, and the data in the prefetch information third area is shifted to the prefetch information second area. , and the data in the look-ahead information fourth area is shifted to the look-ahead information third area.

On the other hand, if the value of the pending ball number counter 223a before updating when the variation pattern command is received is "2", the data in the look-ahead information first area is shifted to the look-ahead information 0th area, and the look-ahead second area The data is shifted to the look-ahead first area, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the third and fourth areas of the look-ahead information in which the variable effect is not suspended, so the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the financial burden.

Note that regardless of the presence or absence of data, the data in the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information may be shifted to areas with area numbers smaller by 1 (0th to third areas of the prefetch information). In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) for each of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information, which facilitates the creation of programs.

The notification button ON counter 223c is a counter for counting the time during which the notification button 23 is continuously pressed. The notification button on-counter 223c is set to 0 as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S810 in FIG. 21) executed when the power is turned on.

The operation status of the notification button 23 is determined by the notification button determination processing (S1201, see FIG. 26A) of the notification processing (S909, see FIG. 25) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 22) by the MPU 221. be. Then, (1) when the notification button 23 is not pressed, (2) when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 described later is invalid, and (3) notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is being executed, the value of the notification button ON counter 223c continues to be initialized to 0 (see S1305 in FIG. 26(a)).

On the other hand, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a state where notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed, not during the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, the notification button determination process is performed. Inside, the notification button ON counter 223c is incremented by 1 (see S1304 in FIG. 26(a)).

Here, the notification process in which the notification button determination process is executed is executed at intervals of 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 22). By updating the notification button on-counter 223c as described above, the notification button 23 is activated in a situation where notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed, instead of the period during which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated. When the pressing operation is continuously performed, the duration of the pressing operation is counted in units of 1 millisecond. Further, when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is interrupted (when the player releases the pressing operation of the notification button 23), the notification button ON counter 223c is initialized to 0, so that the notification button 23 is pressed again. is pressed, the duration of the pressing operation can be correctly counted again by the notification button ON counter 223c.

The value of the notification button ON counter 223c is referred to determine whether or not the notification button 23 has been pressed continuously for one second or more. That is, in the sound lamp control device 113, the notification execution determination process (S1202, see FIG. 26B) is executed in the above-described notification process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221, and the value of the notification button ON counter 223c is Referenced. If the value of the notification button on-counter 223c is 1000, it is determined that the notification button 23 has been pressed continuously for 1000 milliseconds, that is, one second or longer, and processing for starting execution of notification is executed (Fig. 26(b) S1312). As a result, when the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for one second or longer in a situation where notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed, instead of the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, , the notification of whether or not there is a big hit variable performance among the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held is executed. Note that the notification button ON counter 223c is initialized to 0 when it is determined that the value is 1000 and processing for starting execution of notification is performed (S1314 in FIG. 26(b)).

The notification execution flag 223d is a flag for indicating the execution of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23. When it is on, it indicates that the notification is to be executed, and when it is off, the notification is not to be executed. Represents to The notification execution counter 223e is a counter for counting the execution time of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23. FIG.

The notification execution flag 223d is set to OFF as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S810 in FIG. 21) executed when the power is turned on. Also, the notification execution counter 223e is initialized to 0 in the initial value setting process.

Announcement execution determination processing (S1201, see FIG. 26(b)) of announcement processing (S909, see FIG. 25) executed at intervals of 1 millisecond in the main processing (see FIG. 22) by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 When it is determined that the value of the notification button ON counter 223c is 1000, and it is determined that the notification button 23 has been continuously pressed for one second, the notification execution flag 223d is set to ON, and the notification execution counter 223e It is initialized to 0 (see S1312 and S1315 in FIG. 26(b)).

The notification execution counter 223e is incremented by 1 in the notification stop determination process (see FIG. 29(a)) executed in the notification process when the notification execution flag 223d is on. As described above, the notification process is executed at intervals of 1 millisecond, so the notification execution counter 223e is counted up by 1 every 1 millisecond while the notification execution flag 223d is turned on.

When the notification execution flag 223d is turned on, the notification execution flag 223d is turned on in the notification display setting process (S1204, see FIG. 28) executed in the notification process, except when the jackpot effect or demonstration effect is in progress. and immediately after the notification execution flag 223d is turned on (that is, when the remainder when the value of the notification execution counter 223e is divided by 1000 is 0), the prefetching process is executed ( See S1334 in FIG. 28).

In this look-ahead processing, out of the look-ahead information first to fourth areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 or the like stored in each area where the variable effect is reserved is read in advance. , it is determined whether or not a big win is achieved in the variable performance. The number of pending variable effects (number of pending balls) is determined from the value of the pending ball number counter 223a. Further, in the pre-reading process performed in the notification process, the value of the first win random number counter C1 or the like stored in the pre-reading information 0th area is also read out, and it is determined whether or not the variable performance being executed becomes a big win.

In addition, when determining whether or not the variable performance being executed is a big hit, the contents of the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 at the time of execution of the variable performance are stored, and based on the contents. You may make a decision by In this case, in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, only the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas may be provided without providing an area corresponding to the look-ahead information 0th area.

As a result of the look-ahead processing, when it is determined that there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the pending variable effect, and when the variable effect being executed is a big win, a jackpot notification command is issued to the display control device. 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display a jackpot notification image for notifying the existence of the jackpot by this jackpot notification command.

This jackpot notification command is information representing the number of times of suspension of the variable performance that will be a big hit (reserved ball that will be a big hit) when it is determined by the pre-reading process that there is a variable performance that will be a big hit in the pending variable performance. including. Specifically, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first area of the look-ahead information, the number of times of suspension is "1" variable effect (that is, the first suspended variable effect in the suspended If the variable performance produced) is a jackpot, the information is included in the jackpot notification command. Also, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the fourth area of the look-ahead information, the variable performance with the number of suspensions of "3" (that is, the third suspended variation in the suspended variable performance) If the performance) is a jackpot, the information is included in the jackpot notification command.

When two or more variable performances among a plurality of suspended variable performances result in a big hit, information indicating the number of times of suspension of the variable performance with the smallest number of times of suspension among the variable performances that become a big hit is included in the jackpot notification command. included. In such a case, the jackpot notification command may include information indicating the number of suspensions of all the variable effects that result in the jackpot.

In addition, even if there is a variable performance that will be a big hit in the pending variable performance, if the variable performance that is being executed is a big hit, the jackpot notification command without including information indicating the number of times of suspension of the variable performance that will be a big hit to the display control device 114 . In such a case, the jackpot announcement command includes information indicating that the variable performance being executed is a big hit and information indicating the number of suspensions of all variable performances that are a big hit among the suspended variable performances. good too.

While the notification execution flag 223d is on, the value of the notification execution counter 223e is determined in the notification stop determination process (S1205, see FIG. 29A) executed in the notification process. Then, when it is determined that the value of the notification execution counter 223e is 5000, a notification stop command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the notification execution flag 223d is turned off. The notification stop command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to stop displaying the jackpot notification image indicating the existence of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Since the notification execution counter 223e is a counter that counts up by 1 every millisecond as described above, five seconds after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is performed. Notice ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9A, the details of the jackpot notification image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 9(a) is a diagram showing a state in which a big hit notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

The jackpot announcement image is displayed by changing the color of the boy's hair HB from the normal color in the boy's image displayed in the small area Ds2. That is, while the hair HB is normally displayed in black (see FIG. 4B), the hair HB is displayed in gold when the jackpot notification image is displayed. As described above, the jackpot notification image is displayed when the game player presses the notification button 23 for one second or longer, and there is a variable effect that will result in a big win among the variable effects being executed and the variable effects being held. This is an image that will be On the other hand, when the player presses the notification button 23 for one second or more, if neither the variable performance being executed nor the variable performance being held has a variable performance that will result in a big win, the big win notification image is not displayed, and the small win notification image is not displayed. The color of the boy's hair HB in the region Ds2 remains black. Therefore, the player presses the notification button 23 for one second or longer, and confirms whether the color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 remains black or changes to gold. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win among the variable performance and the pending variable performance.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the player wants to stop the game and leave the seat, or when he/she wants to complete a task such as a call or an e-mail using a mobile phone, the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for one second or longer. By operating, it is possible to know whether or not there is a variable performance that will be a big hit among the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held. Therefore, the player can decide to immediately stop the game in order to leave the seat or complete the task if there is no variable effect that will result in a big win. In addition, if there is a variable performance that results in a big win, the player can decide to continue the game until a big win is achieved. In other words, with this notice button 23, when the player wants to leave the room or finish his/her business, it can be determined whether or not the action can be executed immediately.

In addition, in this embodiment, unless the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second) by the notification button on-counter 223c, the variable performance that becomes a big hit during the variable performance being executed and the variable performance that is being held. It is not notified whether or not there is Unless there are special circumstances, such as when you want to stop the game and leave the seat, or when you want to finish a call or e-mail on a mobile phone, etc. If it is known whether or not one of them will result in a big win before the pending variable performance is executed, the enjoyment of the game is conversely deprived.

In this embodiment, it is notified whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win among the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held only when the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second). When the player unintentionally touches the notification button 23, if the touched time is less than a predetermined time, a big win is included in either the variable performance being executed or the variable performance being held. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the game will be played. Further, if there is no other function that allows the player to press the button continuously for a predetermined time (1 second), the pressing operation that continues for the predetermined time (1 second) is included in the variable performance being executed or held. It is possible to give recognition to the player that it is for notifying whether or not there is a variable effect that will result in a big win. Therefore, it is possible for the player to avoid confusion with a function by another pressing operation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a result of performing the look-ahead processing, if it is determined that there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the pending variable effect, the variable effect that will be the big win is displayed in the pending variable effect in the big hit notification image. The player can be notified of which variable effect, that is, the ball that will be a big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(a), the reserved ball number pattern (“●” pattern) displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db is normally displayed in blue, which corresponds to the reserved ball R1 that is the big hit. The reserved ball number pattern is displayed in red.

As described above, in the jackpot notification command, if it is determined by the pre-reading process that there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the pending variable effect, the number of times of suspension of the variable effect that will be a big hit (reserved ball that will be a big hit R1) is included. According to the information included in the big hit notification command, if the reserved ball R1 to be the big hit is the first reserved ball in the pending variable effect, the number of reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db. Among them, the reserved ball number pattern displayed on the leftmost side is displayed in red, and the other reserved ball number patterns are displayed in blue. When the retained ball R1 to be a big hit is the second retained ball in the retained variable performance, it is displayed second from the left among the retained ball numbers displayed in the retained ball number display area Db. The reserved ball number pattern is displayed in red, and the other reserved ball number patterns are displayed in blue. The example shown in FIG. 9(a) is for the case where the held ball R1 to be the big hit is the second held ball in the pending variable effect.

When the retained ball R1 to be a big hit is the third retained ball in the retained variable performance, it is displayed third from the left among the retained ball numbers displayed in the retained ball number display area Db. The reserved ball number pattern is displayed in red, and the other reserved ball number patterns are displayed in blue. When the retained ball R1 to be a big hit is the fourth retained ball in the retained variable effect, the fourth from the left (rightmost) among the retained ball numbers displayed in the retained ball number display area Db. The reserved ball number pattern displayed in is displayed in red, and the other reserved ball number patterns are displayed in blue.

If the jackpot notifying command does not include information indicating the number of suspensions of the variable performance that will result in a big win, it means that the variable performance that is being executed will result in a big win. In this case, all the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the reserved ball number display area D are displayed in blue.

When the player presses the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer and confirms that the color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 has changed to gold, it is further displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db. By confirming what number of the reserved ball number pattern from the left is displayed in red among the reserved ball number patterns to be displayed, it is possible to grasp the reserved ball that will be a big hit. Also, while the color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 changes to gold, if the number of reserved ball patterns displayed in the number of reserved ball display area Db is all blue, then the variable effect during execution is performed. It is possible to make the player grasp that the jackpot will be won.

As a result, when a player can grasp that there is a variable performance that will result in a big hit in the variable performance being executed and the variable performance that is on hold, whether the big win will come immediately or it will take some time before the big win is achieved. , In addition, it is also possible to know how many times the remaining variable performance is performed until the jackpot is achieved. Therefore, based on such information, the player can determine whether or not he/she has time to leave the table or complete his/her business before the jackpot is won.

In addition, in this embodiment, when two or more variable performances among a plurality of suspended variable performances result in a big hit, the number of suspensions of the variable performance with the smallest number of suspensions among the variable performances that are the big hits is set. Since the information to be displayed is included in the big hit notification command, the reserved ball number pattern displayed in red in the reserved ball number display area Db is also a reservation corresponding to the variable performance with the smallest number of reservations among the variable performances that become the big hit. Only the ball number pattern is displayed in red. In addition, when the variable performance being executed becomes a big hit, even if there is a variable performance that becomes a big hit in the pending variable performance, the jackpot notification command is issued without including the information indicating the number of suspension times of the variable performance that becomes a big win. is transmitted to the display control device 114, so that only the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 becomes gold, and all the pending ball number patterns in the pending ball number display area Db are displayed in blue. As a result, the player can at least grasp the variation effect that will result in a big win in the near future, so that the player can determine whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the business by then.

In the present embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed for one second or more and the variable effect being executed becomes a big hit, the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 is changed from black to gold. The number of reserved balls pattern displayed in the number of reserved balls display area Db is displayed in blue, but when the notification button 23 is pressed for one second or longer, and the variable effect being executed becomes a big hit. , the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 may be displayed in rainbow instead of gold. As a result, if the color of the boy's hair HB changes to gold, the player can understand that there is a big win in the pending variable effect, and if the color of the boy's hair HB changes to rainbow, the player can know that the game will be executed. You can instantly grasp that the variable performance in the middle will be a big hit. In other words, the player can easily grasp at least whether the variable performance being executed will result in a big win or whether the pending variable performance will result in a big win just by the change in the boy's hair HB.

When the notification button 23 is pressed for one second or more and the variable performance being executed becomes a big win, the color of the boy's hair HB is changed from black to gold to make the pending variable performance a big win. If there is a variable effect, the color of the boy's hair HB remains black, and the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the big win is selected from the reserved ball number patterns displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db. You may make it change from blue to red. As a result, if the color of the boy's hair HB changes, the variable performance during execution will be a big hit, and if the color of the pending ball number pattern changes, the variable performance corresponding to the pending ball number pattern whose color has changed will be a big win. It is possible to tell the player what will happen in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, when two or more variable performances out of a plurality of reserved variable performances result in a big hit, information indicating the number of suspensions of all the variable performances that will be a big hit is sent as a jackpot notification command. In addition, if the variable performance being executed is a big hit and there is a variable performance that is a big hit in the pending variable performance, the information that the variable performance being executed is a big hit and the pending As described above, the jackpot notifying command may include the information indicating the number of suspensions of all the variable performances that result in a big win among the variable performances that are provided. In such a case, the number of pending ball symbols corresponding to all the pending variable effects that can be grasped by the big win notification command may be displayed in red in the number of pending ball display areas Db. As a result, the player can once grasp the number of suspensions of all variable performances that become a big hit among the suspended variable performances when the notification button 23 is pressed for one second or longer. Therefore, the player can know whether or not a big win will be made again after a big win, and how many times the variable effect will be performed between the big wins in the case of multiple big wins. At this point, the player can decide whether to leave the room or finish the business.

When the notification button 23 is pressed for one second or more, the variable performance being executed becomes a big hit, and if there is a variable performance that becomes a big hit among the pending variable performances, the variable performance being executed is determined. If the jackpot announcement command includes information indicating that the jackpot will be a big hit and information that indicates the number of suspensions of all variable performances that will be a big hit among the pending variable performances, the color of the boy's hair HB will be changed to rainbow. The number of reserved balls symbols corresponding to all variable effects that change and result in a big hit may be displayed in red in the number of reserved balls display area Db. Thus, the player can grasp at once that the variable performance being executed becomes a big win and the number of suspensions of all the variable performances that become a big win among the suspended variable performances.

In addition, the presence or absence of the big hit of variable performance being executed is displayed for the boy's hair HB, and the presence or absence of the big hit of the variable performance of the corresponding number of times of suspension for each reserved pattern displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db. may be displayed. That is, if the variable performance being executed is a big hit and there is a variable performance that is a big hit in the pending variable performance, the boy's hair HB and the pending ball that corresponds to the pending variable performance that is a big win. The color is changed in several patterns, the variable performance being executed does not become a big hit, and if there is a variable performance that becomes a big win in the pending variable performance, the color of the boy's hair HB is not changed, Only the pending number of balls symbols corresponding to all pending variable effects that result in a big hit may be changed in color. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player in a more comprehensible manner the variation effect of the big win.

In addition, when there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the pending variable effect, as a method of notifying the player of the reserved ball that will be the big hit, the number of reserved ball patterns displayed in the number of reserved ball display area Db is supported. It is not limited to the method of changing the color of the reserved ball number pattern, but the corresponding reserved ball number pattern may be blinked or the shape may be changed from a circle to a square. Also, a character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may display an effect indicating the corresponding number of pending balls symbol. In addition, the number of times of holding the ball which becomes a big hit may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or may be displayed by a lamp or the like provided separately from the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

Returning to FIG. 5, the description of the RAM 223 is continued. The ball undetected counter 223f is a counter for counting the time during which no ball entering the general winning hole 63, the first ball entering hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, or the out hole 66 is detected. The ball launching stop flag 223g is a flag indicating that the ball launching unit 112a that shoots the ball toward the game area of the game board 13 has stopped launching the ball. It indicates that it is stopped, and if it is off, it indicates that the ball is being hit. The ball non-detection counter 223f and the ball hitting stop flag 223g are set to "0" and "off" as initial values in the initial value setting process (see S810 in FIG. 21) of the RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on.

The ball undetected counter 223f counts the general winning hole 63, the first ball winning hole 64, and the specific winning hole 65a during the ball launch stop determination process (S1203, see FIG. 27) of the notification process executed every millisecond. , when it is determined from the output signals of the various switches 208 provided at the respective outlets that there is no ball entering the out hole 66 (S1323), the ball hitting stop flag 223g is off (that is, when the ball is hit is incremented by 1 (S1327). As a result, the ball is not entered into the general winning hole 63, the first ball entering hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, or the out hole 66 in a state where it is determined that the ball is not stopped. It can be counted every millisecond by the undetected counter 223f.

Here, the general winning hole 63, the first ball-entering hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, and the out-hole 66 are holes provided in the game area of the game board 13, as described above with reference to FIG. Also, the ball guided to the game area by the ball shooting unit 112a is discharged out of the game area. These are all the openings through which balls are ejected out of the playing area. In other words, when no ball is entered into these mouths for a predetermined period of time, it indicates that the ball launching unit 112a has not launched a ball into the game area.

In this embodiment, in the ball launch stop determination process, the ball non-detection counter 223f is 5000 or more (that is, when a ball enters the general winning hole 63, the first ball entering hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, or the out hole 66). If it is determined that the ball has not been detected for five seconds or longer, the ball launching stop flag 223g is set to ON assuming that the ball launching unit 112a has stopped launching the ball into the game area. Also, when it is determined from the output signals of the various switches 208 that the ball has entered the general winning hole 63, the first ball entering hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, or the out hole 66, the ball launch stop flag 223g is turned off. It is set to off, and the ball undetected counter 223f is initialized to zero. By initializing the ball undetected counter 223f to 0, it is possible to count the time during which no ball is detected entering the general winning hole 63, the first ball entering hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, or the out hole 66. there is

In this embodiment, the output signals of the various switches 208 are input not only to the main controller 110 but also to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the output signals from the various switches 208, and general prize winning Whether or not the ball entered the opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66 was determined. Instead of this, when the main controller 110 detects a ball entering the general winning hole 63, the first ball entering hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, or the out hole 66 based on the output signals of the various switches 208, the ball entering is detected. A notification entry detection command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound ramp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113, based on whether or not the entry detection command is received, selects the general winning hole 63, the first entry Whether or not a ball enters the ball hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, or the out hole 66 may be determined.

The ball hitting stop flag 223g is referred to in the notification display setting process (S11204, see FIG. 28) executed in the notification process. Specifically, as a result of the look-ahead processing executed in the notification display setting process, it is determined that there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the pending variable effect, or that the variable effect that is being executed will be a big win. , When the big hit notification command for displaying the big hit notification image on the third symbol display device 81 is set, the ball hitting stop flag 223g is referred to (S1337). Then, if the ball hitting stop flag 223g is on, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation performance up to the latest big hit fluctuation performance is calculated, and the calculated fluctuation time is notified to the display control device 114. A command is set (S1340).

In addition, for the variable performance being executed, the remaining variable time (the remaining variable time from that point until the end of the variable performance) is calculated. For the pending variable performance, the variable time is calculated for each variable performance. What is calculated is up to the variable performance determined to be the most recent big win by the look-ahead processing, and when the variable performance being executed becomes the big win, only the remaining variable time of the variable performance being executed is calculated. Also, when the number of pending balls is 3, if the second suspended variable performance among the pending variable performances becomes the most recent jackpot, the remaining variable time of the variable performance being executed and the first and The variation time of each variation effect that is secondly reserved is calculated. That is, in this case, the calculation of the variable time of the variable effect that is held third is not performed.

The remaining variation time of the variation effect being executed is determined from the variation time determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the variation pattern command. It is calculated by subtracting the elapsed time from the start of the variable effect being executed. It should be noted that the fluctuation time of the variable performance being executed may be determined from the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead information 0th area of the look-ahead information storage area 223b.

Each variable time of the pending variable effect is calculated based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth areas of the lookahead information storage area 223b. In this embodiment, the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, when the jackpot lottery is performed). Therefore, when calculating each variable time of the pending variable effect, based on the value of the pending ball number counter 223a at the time of calculation, when the execution of each pending variable effect is started, the number of pending balls It is done after calculating how many is.

For example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 223a when calculating each variable time of the pending variable effect is "2", the number of pending balls when the variable effect corresponding to the look-ahead information first area is executed becomes "1", and the number of pending balls becomes "0" when the variable effect corresponding to the second area of the look-ahead information is executed. Further, if the value of the pending ball number counter 223a when calculating each variable time of the pending variable effect is "4", the pending ball number when the variable effect corresponding to the look-ahead information first area is executed is "3", the number of pending balls when the variable effect corresponding to the second area of the look-ahead information is executed is "2", and the number of pending balls when the variable effect corresponding to the third area of the look-ahead information is executed becomes "1", and the number of pending balls becomes "0" when the variable effect corresponding to the look-ahead information fourth area is executed.

In addition, when calculating each variable time of the pending variable effect, the number of pending balls when the execution of each pending variable effect is started can be determined only when the calculation is performed. This is because the launch of the ball to the That is, when calculating each variable time of the pending variable effect, there is no possibility of winning the first ball entrance 64, so the number of pending balls does not change. Therefore, even if the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), each variation of the pending variable effect Time can be reliably calculated.

As described above, the variable time notification command displays the remaining variable time of the running variable effect and each variable time of the pending variable effect, which are calculated for the variable effect until the latest big hit, on the display control device. 114 is a command. When the variable time notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the variable time notification image for notifying the player of each variable time notified by the variable time notification command is changed to the above-mentioned jackpot notification image (variation effect during execution or The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display it together with an image notifying that there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the pending variable effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9(b), the details of the variable time notification image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 9(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a variable effect notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), the fluctuation time notification image is displayed in the small area Ds3 in accordance with the jackpot notification image displayed in the small area Ds2 and the reserved ball count display area Db. In the variable time notification image, the character string "running remaining" is displayed as a character string to indicate the remaining variable time calculated for the variable effect being executed, and on the right side of it, the variable time notification command The notified remaining variation time (“5 seconds” in the example of FIG. 9B) is displayed.

Further, in the variable time notification image, below the character string "execution remaining", the character strings "hold 1", "hold 2", "hold 3", and "hold 4" are displayed in order from the top. "Hold 1" is a character string for indicating the variable time of the first suspended variable effect, and to the right of "Hold 1" is the first suspended variation notified by the variable time notification command. The change time of the effect (“30 seconds” in the example of FIG. 9B) is displayed. "Hold 2" is a character string for indicating the variable time of the second suspended variable performance, and on the right side of "Hold 2" is the second suspended variation notified by the variable time notification command. The change time of the effect (“90 seconds” in the example of FIG. 9B) is displayed. In addition, "suspended 3" and "suspended 4" are character strings for indicating the variable time of the variable effect that is suspended in the third and fourth, respectively, and notified by the variable time notification command on the right side of each character string Display the variable time of the corresponding variable performance that has been performed.

In addition, the variable time notification command is notified of each variable time of the variable performance until the most recent jackpot hit, and of course, regarding the variable performance that is not pending, even if the variable performance is pending The variable time is not notified by the variable time notification command for the variable performance to be executed after the variable performance that becomes a big hit. For variable performances for which the variable time is not notified by the variable time notification command, "-" is displayed instead of the variable time on the right side of the corresponding character string "suspend 1" to "suspend 4".

For example, in the example of FIG. 9 (b), since the number of pending balls is 3, there is no variable effect corresponding to "suspended 4" (fourth suspended variable effect), so "-" is displayed. ing. In addition, since the number of reserved balls displayed in the number of reserved balls displayed in the number of reserved balls display area Db is displayed in red, the number of reserved balls displayed second from the left is displayed in red. Since it becomes a big hit, the variable time of the third suspended variable performance is not notified by the variable time notification command. Therefore, "-" is also displayed to the right of "Hold 3". If the variable performance being executed becomes a big hit, the variable time of all pending variable performances is not included in the variable time notification command. Therefore, in this case, "-" is displayed on the right side of all of "Hold 1" to "Hold 4".

A jackpot announcement displayed on a third pattern display device 81 when a game player presses a notification button 23 for one second or longer and there is a variable performance to be a big win in the variable performance being executed or the variable performance being held. By displaying the variable time notification image as shown in FIG. 9B together with the image, the player can not only grasp whether or not there is a variable effect that will result in a big win, but also a big win in the near future. You can keep track of how long it takes. Therefore, the player can quickly determine whether or not he/she has time to leave the seat or finish his/her business, taking into account the time until the next big win.

In addition, since the variable time (remaining variable time in the variable performance being executed) is displayed for each variable performance until the latest jackpot, the player can check which variable performance is being executed. It is also possible to make decisions such as whether to leave the room or finish the business.

In addition, in the present embodiment, while each variable time in the variable performance until the latest jackpot is displayed, the variable time of the variable performance to be executed after that is not displayed (displayed as "-" is done). As a result, the player can easily grasp the time until the latest big win.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable time notification image is displayed together with the big win notification image only when it is determined that the ball has stopped hitting the game area. This is because, as described above, when calculating each variable time of the pending variable effect, there is no possibility of winning the first ball entrance 64, so the number of pending balls does not change. Even if the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the performance starts (strictly, when the jackpot lottery is held), each variable time of the pending variable performance is guaranteed. This is because it can be calculated as Conversely, in the present embodiment, unless it is determined that the hitting of the ball into the game area is stopped, the variable time notification image is not displayed together with the jackpot notification image. Therefore, since the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to suppress the display of the inaccurate variable time for the pending variable performance, so that the player can leave the seat or finish the business. It is possible to suppress erroneous determination as to whether there is time.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description of the RAM 223 is continued. The notification button invalid flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is in an invalid period. Indicates that it is the effective period of the pressing operation. The definite command flag 223i is a flag indicating that a definite command has been received from the main controller 110. When it is ON, it indicates that the definite command has been received, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it has not been received.

Here, the confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display executed by the first symbol display device 37 in the main control device 110 is confirmed. Along with the display, the main controller 110 transmits to the audio lamp controller 113 .

The notification button invalid flag 223h and the confirmation command flag 223i are each set to "off" as an initial value in the initial value setting process (see S810 in FIG. 21) of the RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on. Then, in the notification execution determination process (S1202, see FIG. 26(b)) of the notification process, if the notification button ON counter 223c reaches 1000, that is, it is determined that the notification button 23 has been pressed down by the player for one second or longer. If so, the notification execution flag 223d is set to ON to start the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, and the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to ON. While the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to ON, the value of the notification button ON counter 223c is maintained regardless of whether or not the notification button 23 is pressed in the notification button determination process (S1201, see FIG. 26A). It continues to be initialized to 0. As a result, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated.

On the other hand, the confirmation command flag 223i is set to ON when the confirmation command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1011 in FIG. 23). Then, this confirmation command flag 223i is referred to in the notification button invalidation canceling process (S1206, see FIG. 29B) of the notification process. Specifically, when the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to ON, if the confirmation command flag 223i is ON, the confirmation command flag 223i is turned off, and the pending number counter 223a at that time is 0. It is determined whether or not there is, and if the suspension number counter 223a is 0, the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to OFF.

If the fixed command flag 223i is on, that is, when the fixed command is received from the main control device 110, the suspension number counter 223a is 0, it means that the execution of all the variable effects including the reserved part is completed and the pending It means that the fluctuation effect of has become 0. That is, in the present embodiment, after the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is set to be invalid, all of the variable effects including the pending portion (including the variable effect that is suspended after the invalid setting is performed) When the execution is finished and the pending variable effect disappears, the notification button invalidation flag 223h is set to OFF, and the invalidation of the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is cancelled.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is disabled until the pending variable effect becomes zero. In other words, even if the notification button 23 is pressed during that period, the notification is not executed. As a result, according to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, for example, when the player leaves the game machine, even if someone other than the player presses the notification button 23, at least the pachinko machine In 10, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win for a person other than the player until the pending variable performance becomes 0. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another player from obtaining the profit of the jackpot obtained by the variable performance withheld by the game of the original player, and to protect the profit of the original player. . Further, when the pending variable performance becomes 0, it is considered that all the variable performance suspended by the game of the person who originally played the game has been once executed, so the person who played the game after that is notified button 23. is pressed for one second or longer, a notification based on the pressing operation can be obtained.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main controller 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, and a command storage area (not shown) for starting a variable effect in the ON state. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) indicating

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 23) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from main controller 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 23). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 24).

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes and continues the third pattern. It controls the advance notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. there is

The audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input port 238 , and the display control device 114 sends a command to the audio lamp control device 113 to instruct the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 determined by the audio lamp control device 113 . receive from MPU 231 , program ROM 232 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are also connected to input port 238 via bus line 240 . A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237 and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different jackpot lottery probabilities and the number of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on commands input from the sound lamp control device 113 . The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The program ROM 232 also has at least a display data table storage area 232a and an additional data table storage area 232b.

The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110 is stored. The display data table describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time in the presentation corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 determines an effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, reads out the display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and displays the read display. The display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled according to the data table.

Details of the display data table will now be described. The display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the command from the sound lamp control device 113. For example, variable effect, demonstration effect, A display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

Incidentally, the demonstration effect is a effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. A third pattern composed of main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The fixed display effect is performed by the third pattern display device 81 when the stop pattern is fixedly displayed by receiving a fixed command (display fixed command) from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the variable effect. This is the presentation that will be displayed. For example, if the stopped symbol is a missing symbol, the effect of emphasizing the missing is performed, and if the stopped symbol is any of 15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, and 2R probability variable jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. A performance is held. The player can easily judge the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing this fixed display effect.

The restart effect is performed when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the change effect indicated by the change pattern command. This is an effect of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display an image in which the third pattern is vibrated (swinged) around a predetermined position. When the player visually recognizes that the third pattern is vibrated and displayed after the variation of the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the stop pattern is not decided at that time. can be recognized.

The display data table storage area 232a stores one display data table each corresponding to the demonstration effect and the restart effect. A display data table for variation, which is a display data table for variation presentation, is prepared one by one according to a combination of a set variation presentation pattern and a stop symbol. In addition, as the display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect, one that confirms and displays the off pattern as a stop pattern, one that confirms and displays the probability variable jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot), and the normal jackpot (15R normal (jackpot) are prepared respectively.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a person or a character, etc., is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The back face type is any one of back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player by operating the frame button 22 (one of "town stage", "sea stage", and "mountain stage"). or to specify whether to display a rear image different from rear faces A to C. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

The MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn when the back face type specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed. . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. Display state information indicating whether to display the rear image may also be defined. The rear image is displayed with its display range, brightness, color, etc. changing with the lapse of time. This display state information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the initial state was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear image in the initial state indicated by the display state information was displayed.

Further, the display state information is information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the image based on this display data table on the third pattern display device 81) was started. may In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third pattern display device 81). Based on the state of the rear image displayed at the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or the display of the image on the third pattern display device 81) was started Identify.

Further, the display state information includes information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image corresponding to the initial state and drawing of an image based on the display data table (or rendering of the image based on the display data table) according to the back surface type. Display on the third pattern display device 81) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start, or along with the back surface type and display state information, the type information of the display state information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or the drawing of an image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 of the image based on the display data table). display) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating the address where the back image to be displayed is stored instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe a unique identification number assigned to the third symbol as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In this embodiment, a unique identification number is assigned to each of the third symbols for identifying each. For example, a main symbol of "0" is assigned an identification number of "0", a main symbol of "1" is assigned an identification number of "1", and a main symbol of "2" is assigned an identification number of " 2” is attached.

However, as the pattern type information of the third pattern until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the identification information of the third pattern is not directly defined, but the stop of the previous variation effect is performed. Offset information with the identification number of the pattern is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

The offset information is defined as the symbol type information of the third symbol until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation, as the pattern type information at each address, the identification information of the third pattern to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address and the stop pattern of the previous variation effect are displayed. Describe the difference (offset information) from the identification information of As a result, the variable performance can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the pattern type information at each address is the identification information of the third pattern to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address, and the variable effect currently being performed is stopped. A difference (offset information) from the displayed third symbol (stop symbol) is described. As a result, the variable performance can be executed so that the third symbol is stopped with the stop symbol set for the current variable performance.

It should be noted that the timing of switching from the offset information from the stop pattern of the previously performed variable performance as the pattern type information to the offset information with the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, the third symbol is displayed fluctuating at high speed. The predetermined time is set so as to be the time that is set. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 11) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read out from the display data table storage area 232a and stored in a display data table buffer 233a provided in the work RAM 233, which will be described later, and the pointer 233c is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233c is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 13), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. As a result, as the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description continues. The additional data table storage area 232b stores the display contents of the additional effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 as additional data prepared for each effect. This is the area where the table is stored. Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from main control device 110. For example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect is displayed. The concept of displaying and superimposing another effect on the one effect, changing the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or changing the image displayed in the one effect includes.

That is, the additional data table contains drawing contents necessary for adding and displaying an image that is normally not displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 110. , the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one effect. is. The additional data table is prepared corresponding to, for example, a form of continuous announcement effect (continuous announcement mode) additionally set for the variable effect, and stored in the additional data table storage area 232b.

Details of the additional data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an example of an additional data table. In the additional data table, in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table, the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address are defined in detail. The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and so on according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as a translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

For example, in the example of FIG. 12, a sprite for specifying a sprite (character) to be additionally displayed for one character (character 1) is associated with address "0097H" defined in the display data table. Type (character type), display position, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information are defined. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (corresponding to address "0001H" in FIG. 12).

It should be noted that "0000H", which is the top address of the additional data table, describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the last address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 12, "00FDH") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the additional data table are drawn. is described.

When the MPU 231 receives the continuous announcement command from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 reads out the additional data table corresponding to the continuous announcement mode indicated by the continuous announcement command from the additional data table storage area 232b, and stores the additional data in the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Store in the table buffer 233b. Each time the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c are drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Then, the content of the image to be drawn next is identified and a drawing list (see FIG. 13), which will be described later, is created.

For example, in the example of FIG. 12, when the pointer 233c becomes "0097H", the MPU 231 adds various sprites defined at address "0097H" of the display data table to address "0097H" of the additional data table. The character 1 sprite is added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233c is "0001H", Null data is specified at the address "0001H" of the additional data table. 0001H" to generate a drawing list based on the various sprites defined in ". Further, when the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table is "End" information, or when the pointer 233c indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example, , in the example of FIG. 12, when the pointer 233c indicates an address after "00FEH"), it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

By transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. The prescribed image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When displaying another effect image (for example, continuous preview effect image) in addition to the effect image (for example, variable effect image), add an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed. By setting it in the data table buffer 233b, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. As a result, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, it is possible to provisionally display an image in which the other effect images are superimposed on each original effect image. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared. By defining separately, 32+5=37 types of displays and additional data tables can be prepared, and an increase in capacity of the display data table storage area 232a and the additional data table storage area 232b can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various modes of presentation in the capacities provided in the display data table storage area 232a and the additional data table storage area 232b, thereby facilitating further diversification of presentation images. can be planned.

Further, as in the pachinko machine 10, by defining other effect images to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233a, Even when it is decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, the additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. By simply setting in the data table buffer 233b, the additional effect image to be displayed can be easily displayed in addition to the original effect image.

Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233b From the table, while updating the pointer 233c at each time, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and to easily obtain one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. can be generated to Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on the command from the main controller 110, the effects to be additionally displayed By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of presentation displays from a small number of data tables.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description is continued. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. This work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, an additional data table buffer 223b, a pointer 233c, a drawing list area 233d, and a clock counter 233e.

The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 232a. , and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233c by 1, and based on the rendering content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 13) is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

The additional data table buffer 233b is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a in response to a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 113. A buffer for storing additional data tables corresponding to effect images. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 temporarily writes Null data indicating that there is no additional display object to be displayed in the additional data table buffer 233b. Clear contents.

After that, the MPU 231, based on a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 113, the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to display the effect. If there is an effect to be additionally displayed, the presence or absence of the additional data table is selected from the additional data table storage area 232b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. store in

While incrementing the pointer 233c one by one, the MPU 231 adds the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the drawing contents stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the added data table, a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 13) is generated in which the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 are described for each frame. . As a result, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the additional data table buffer 233b stores Null data. is displayed as is.

The pointer 233c is for designating an address for acquiring corresponding drawing contents from the display data table and the additional data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233c to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. During the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer Update processing is executed (see S1911 in FIG. 35 and FIG. 39), and the value of the pointer 233c is incremented by one (see S1981 in FIG. 39).

Every time the pointer 233c is updated, the MPU 231 extracts the address indicated by the pointer 233c from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. , and creates a drawing list (see FIG. 13), which will be described later.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, that The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

The drawing list area 233d allows the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes the address where the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. The image data of the sprite is obtained from the memory area specified by the address in the storage area 234a. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read out from the ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement/reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semi-transparency according to the semi-transparency value. processing, compositing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, color correction processing according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. Above, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237 .

The MPU 231 extracts the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c and other images to be drawn in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. (For example, a pending image that displays the number of pending balls, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, a jackpot notification image or a variable time notification image that is displayed based on the operation of pressing the notification button 23), 1 A drawing list is created by generating detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for a frame and rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of sprite (display object) data depends on the sprite type defined in the display data table and the additional data table, or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately obtains the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. , and that information can be easily included in the draw list details.

In addition, the MPU 231 stores other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite, in the display data table and additional data. Copy the information specified in the table as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first is arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last is arranged on the frontmost side.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description is continued. The clock counter 233e is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (c )) is executed, the clock counter 233e is decremented by one each time the display setting process (S1603, see FIG. 35) is executed. As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233e becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The character ROM 235 has a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a pattern (background pattern or decorative pattern) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, the above-mentioned image data is stored in compressed form in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In this embodiment, the image data before compression consists of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of approximately 1024 Mbytes is compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frames of frame buffer areas for storing one frame of images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

The image controller 237 generates one frame of image data in accordance with the drawing list, writes it into one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and reads the one frame of image data written into the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. , and outputs the read image data to the third pattern display device 81 through the output port 239, thereby causing the third pattern display device 81 to continuously display a plurality of frame images.

The image controller 237 reads the sprite image data (compressed image data) specified in the drawing list from the character storage area 235a according to the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and draws the data. Processing is performed according to the drawing information specified in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written in one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list.

The writing of one frame of image data into one of the frame buffer areas and the reading of one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. When one frame of image data has been read out from the other frame buffer area, the one frame of image data previously written in one frame buffer area is read out. Image data for the next one frame is written into the frame buffer area of .

By alternately writing image data into and reading out image data from one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images can be continuously displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can be displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 14 to 20. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the start-up processing and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. The MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing to perform various types of processing that should be executed periodically.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In timer interrupt processing and main processing, based on various processing, commands to be transmitted to payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, etc. are generated and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the pending ball number command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 15). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the variation process (see FIG. 16) and the variation start process (FIG. 17) which is one process of the variation process. In addition, a ball shooting signal set for shooting a ball in the process of S111, which will be described later, is transmitted to the shooting control device 112. FIG.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened or closed. A large-opening opening/closing process for opening the door is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of "o" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 , the variable display of the second symbol is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in a winning state, the electric accessary attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

Next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S106). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 . Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the stop type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values. (899, 99, 99, 198, and 250 respectively in this embodiment) are cleared to 0 respectively. Also, when the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 or the second random number counter CINI2. The initial value of the second winning random number counter C2 is read, and the initial value is set to the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first entrance 64, the starting prize winning process is executed (S110). The details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, and the details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the starting prize-winning process, the firing control process is executed (S111), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . When the ball shooting is on, the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, the starting winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S110). In the starting winning process, it is determined whether or not a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Execute the process to hold (suspend). Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

When the MPU 201 executes this starting winning process, first, it determines whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the first ball entrance switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) of the ball into the first ball entrance 64, read in the switch reading process (S106 in FIG. 14), A ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing.

When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (the starting prize has been awarded) (S201: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the value of the suspended ball number counter 203a) It is determined whether or not the number of balls (N) is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S202). Then, whether there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, if the number of operation pending balls N<4 (S202: No) , return to timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and if the number of reserved balls N<4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is 1 is added (S203). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Among the reserved first to fourth areas, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter 203b3 and Each is reserved (stored) in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 (S204).

Specifically, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after the addition by the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the first pending area. Also, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", each storage area in the second pending area, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "3", the third storage area If the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the storage areas of the fourth pending area.

Next, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after addition by the processing of S203 (the number of retained balls N), the first winning random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the retained ball storage area 203b by the processing of S204, the first winning In order to transmit the pending ball number command including the respective values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the pending ball number command is sent to the command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203. Set in the buffer (S205). As a result, the pending ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. After completing the process of S205, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

In the process of S205, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-holds-balls command may be the values read from the counter buffer in the process of S204. A value read out from the value stored (reserved) in 203b may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing this variation process (S109). The variation processing (S109) controls the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S301). During the big win includes the middle of the big win game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big win and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big win game. As a result of determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this process is terminated.

If the jackpot is not in progress (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating. (S302: No), then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not passed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: No), this process is terminated. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined period of time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if a predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N of the variable display held in the main controller 110) is greater than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the pending ball number N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the variable effect. The number of balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variation start process (S307) starts the execution of one of the suspended variable effects, so that the number of suspended balls is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b (S306). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c. The data in each area is shifted such as area 203c, reserved second area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After the data shift process of S306, the variation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S307), returning to timer interrupt processing. Note that the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 17 .

In the processing of S304, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is 0 (S304: No), the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where a demonstration effect is being performed. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S308). In this determination process, after the demonstration command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, until it is determined that the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the pending ball number N) is greater than 0 Identifies the interval as being in demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), the demo command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S309: Yes), the process returns to timer interrupt processing. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 .

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 displays the demo on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control is performed to display the production.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, when the variable display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable stop, the third symbol display device 81 displays the demonstration effect.

If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not being performed (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped is performed. After the fluctuation is stopped, the process of S309 may be executed to set the demonstration command when the second predetermined time has passed. Thus, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop pattern of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration performance.

In the processing of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S310). The display time during fluctuation of the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has elapsed. If not (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing.

In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, a display mode is set in which the red LED is turned on.

Note that the variation process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has passed (S310: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbols are set in advance by the variation start process (S307), which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big win is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the process of S306. Depending on the value of , after the jackpot, the pattern will be a 15R variable jackpot (a variable jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and then a high probability state after the jackpot) or a 2R variable jackpot (with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds after the jackpot and a high probability state). It is determined whether it is a pattern that will be a transitional variable jackpot) or a pattern that will be a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, when the 15R probability variable jackpot is achieved after the jackpot, the blue LED is lit, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is achieved, the red LED is illuminated, and when the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, the red LED and the blue LED are lit. , and the LED of . In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. Then, a confirmation command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and to confirm and display the stopped symbol by receiving the confirmation command for display.

Next, the fluctuation start process (S307), which is one process of the fluctuation process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process (S307). In this fluctuation start process (S307), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, a "jackpot" or "loss" lottery (jackpot lottery) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 And the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start process, first, a big hit is determined based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c and the big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 7(b)). A lottery (win/fail judgment) process is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a big win is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state, "7,307,582" is defined as the jackpot random number value. Further, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420 , 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are defined as jackpot random numbers.

In the processing of S401, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and they match. In that case, it is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the process of S401, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot type table 202b (Fig. 7(b) ), the display mode at the time of the big win is set (S402).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds after the jackpot. A 15R variable jackpot that shifts to a 15R normal jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds with the maximum number of rounds, or a 2R variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds with the maximum number of rounds. be discriminated. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot types, the jackpot types (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) are set as they are as stop types. The display mode at the time of the big hit in the 3-symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display in the display mode at the time of the big win is determined. In determining the variation pattern for the big win, first, the big win variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 7(c)) to be used is selected according to the number of pending balls at that time indicated by the pending ball number counter 203a. Then, in the process of S402, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the group of "15R jackpot common" of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. Select the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. That is, in this case, one of variation A, variation B, and variation C is selected.

In addition, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the group "only for 2R probability variable jackpot" of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. In the present embodiment, only the 2R variation is selected in this case. Note that the relationship between the variation patterns (variation A, variation B, variation C, and 2R variation) and variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode when the win is out is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, the third As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, any one of front-rear out-of-reach reach, front-rear out-of-reach without reach, and complete out-of-order is set. In this embodiment, as described above, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high-probability state or the low-probability state, the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type is Tables are set differently.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the variation time until stop display of the lost symbol is determined. At this time, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state excluding the time-saving state, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the number of reserved balls counter 203a. 202d2 (see FIG. 7(d)) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state or the high-probability state at the time of probability variation, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 ( (see FIG. 7(e)) is selected.

Then, when complete deviation is set as the stop type in the processing of S404, the suspension A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation D or variation E is selected.

In addition, in the processing of S402, when front-rear out-of-reach reach and reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach are set as the stop type, "common reach" of the selected deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 group, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation A, variation B, and variation C are selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the processing of S406, based on the variation pattern determined by the processing of S403 and S405, a variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S406). Also, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S404 via the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S415), and the process returns to the change processing. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are voiced in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. It is sent to the lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the audio ramp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based thereon, and transmits them to the display control device 114 .

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if not stored (S605: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S611.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S706 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S611). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S612, S613).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S612, S613) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S612, S613) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S612, S613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S612), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S607: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S610, interrupts are permitted (S610). Then, the process shifts to the main process, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S701: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S702, S703).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 14) (S703), and the process proceeds to S701.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 14 is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (4 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is performed, and if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the display control of the second pattern by the second pattern display device 83 is performed. done. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the first pattern display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the obtained first hit random number counter C1 depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. is different. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S702 and S703, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated randomly. . In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first winning random number counter C1 and the second winning random number counter C2 are updated using these as initial values for updating. can have randomness.

In addition, in the process of S701, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 18 has been executed, so the power-off process after S704 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) and transmit (S705). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S706), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

Note that the process of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, at the timing when various settings by the timer interrupt processing are finished and when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process is finished. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S701 can be started. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a process to be executed periodically is executed by timer interrupt processing, and the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing in the main processing. A part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed in the main processing every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds). For example, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing was executed by the timer interrupt processing, read processing (S102), large open mouth opening and closing processing (S103), second pattern control processing (S105) and switch reading A part or all of the process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has passed is provided in the main processing, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed, the processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 21, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S915 (see FIG. 22) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 22, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S912 in FIG. 22), it executes power-off processing in S915. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S915 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S802: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S915. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, in a specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword "55AAh" is written by the process of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), it will transfer to S804 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S915 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S802: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the audio lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S804, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S915 is executed (see S914 in FIG. 22). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S915 is executed, the process of S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S915 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S809) in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S810), an interrupt Permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), skipping S809, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, proceeds to S810, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S810), and sets interrupt permission. Then (S811), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S809 is skipped is that when the process of S808 is reached from S804 via the process of S806, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S804, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S901 was executed last time (S901), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S901: No) , S902 to S909 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S910. In the processing of S901, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S902 to S909 do not need to be processed in a short period (within 1 millisecond), whereas the variable display processing of S910 is performed. This is because the command determination processing in step S911 is preferably performed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S911 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S910 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

In the process of S901, when it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S901 was last executed (S901: Yes), the process proceeds to S902. If the process of S901 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 21, the process proceeds directly to S902.

In the processing of S902, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S903 to S911 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S902). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S906 described later (S903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S905 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

Next, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S905). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variable effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and instead of the frame button operation command, the back image of the display control device 114 is changed. Set command. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S905 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S905) ends, the lamp editing processing is executed (S906), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S907, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S908). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S906 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S907 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. executed in time.

Next, a notification process is executed (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. In the notification process, based on the player's pressing operation of the notification button 23, if there is a variable performance that will result in a big win in the variable performance being executed or the variable performance being held, a big hit notification image for notifying that fact is displayed as the first. This is the process of executing the control to display on the 3-symbol display device 81 . Details of the notification process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the process of S910, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. Executes variable display processing, which is processing set for transmission. Details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S911). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S912). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S914), and the power-off processing is executed (S915). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S916), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S913: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S911). This command determination process (S911) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process, first, from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. (S1001). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (S1001: Yes), the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation display process (see FIG. 24) described later, a variation pattern command for display is issued to the display control device 114 to notify the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern. Used when setting.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1003). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S1005), and the process returns to the main process. .

It should be noted that the stop type command indicates the stop type of the variable effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main controller 110 transmits the variation pattern command when starting the variable effect. This command is always sent from 110 . By setting the fluctuation start flag to ON by the process of S1005, in the fluctuation display process executed later, based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the previously received fluctuation pattern command and the stop type extracted from the stop type command , generate a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of these variation patterns and stop types, and execute processing for transmitting them to the display control device 114 .

As a result of the process of S1003, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1003: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1006). Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S1006: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the pending ball number command (that is, the suspended variable effect is suspended) (S1007).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). , the value of the reserved pitch counter 223 a of the voice lamp controller 113 can be matched with the value of the reserved pitch counter 203 a of the main controller 110 . Therefore, even if the value of the pending ball number counter 223a of the voice ramp control device 113 deviates from the value of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the voice ramp control device 113 The value of the reserved ball number counter 223 a can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203 a of the main controller 110 .

Next, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received pending ball number command is extracted, and the read-ahead information in the read-ahead information storage area 223b is extracted. Of the first to fourth areas (see FIG. 8), it stores in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls extracted from the number of reserved balls command by the processing of S1007 (S1008). That is, when the number of held balls is X (1≤X≤4), each value of the extracted first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1. are respectively stored in the first winning random number counter storage area 223b1, the first winning type counter storage area 223b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223b3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223b4 of the look-ahead information X area.

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command are obtained from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). , is the value stored in the X-th reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 when the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X. In other words, the same information (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as the held ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b of the sound ramp controller 113. FIG. The sound ramp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetching information storage area 223b. That is, when the suspended variable performance is executed, the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed, Execution of various performances is determined, and when a notification button 23 is pressed down, it is notified whether or not there is a variable performance to be a big hit among the variable performances being executed and the variable performances being held. Control can be implemented in the audio ramp control process.

Next, a display pending ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the value of the pending ball counter 223a updated by the process of S1007 is set (S1009), and the process returns to the main process. The display reserved ball number command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by command output processing (S902) of the main processing. As a result, the display control device 114 executes a process to display the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third symbol display device 81 .

As a result of the process of S1006, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1006: No), then it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 . If it is determined that this confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), first, the confirmation command flag 223i is set to ON (S1011). The confirmation command flag 223i is referred to in the notification button invalidation canceling process (S1206, see FIG. 29B) of the notification process (S909) described later.

Next, a display confirmation command for notifying reception of the confirmation command is set to the display control device 114 (S1012), and the process returns to the main process. The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by command output processing (S902) of the main processing. In the display control device 114, by receiving the confirmation command for display, the variable effect being executed by the third pattern display device 81 is stopped, and the stop type corresponding to the stop type command for display is previously indicated. By displaying the stop pattern, it is determined and displayed.

As a result of the process of S1010, if it is determined that the definite command has not been received (S1010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1013), it shifts to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 . The demonstration command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demonstration command by the processing of S1013, and after being temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, the command output processing of the main processing (S902) is performed. ) to the display controller 114 .

Next, the variable display process (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing this variable display process (S910).

This variable display process (S910) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variable effect. In order to do so, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110, and these commands are set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. It is a process to Also, in the variable display process, the data in the prefetch information storage area 223b is shifted.

In the variable display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, is off) (S1101: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation display process is executed. End and return to main processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1102), and then in the first to fourth areas of the lookahead information provided in the lookahead information storage area 223b The included data is shifted to the 0th to 3rd areas of the look-ahead information (S1103).

That is, in this case, the suspended variable performance is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance suspended first in terms of time is started. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the 1 area are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the look-ahead information 0th area corresponding to the variable effect being executed. Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the prefetch information second area are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the prefetch information first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the 3 areas are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the second look-ahead information area, and the counters of the look-ahead information fourth area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to 223b4 of the look-ahead information third area.

As a result, the same values as those of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c of the main controller 110 are stored in the lookahead information 0th area. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored in the areas.

Next, the variation pattern in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the processing of S1002 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 23) is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1104). Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 113 of the extracted variation pattern is set (S1105). The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by command output processing (S902) of the main processing. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the variable effect.

Next, the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1106). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 113 of the extracted stop type is set (S1105). The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. The display control device 114 sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set by the processing of S1105 is to be displayed. do.

Next, the value of the held ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 as the held ball is consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the held ball is set) according to the setting of the display variation pattern command. (S1108), a display pending ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the pending ball number indicated by the updated value of the pending ball number counter 223a is set (S1109). Then, it returns to the main processing.

The display reserved ball number command set by the processing of S1109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. be. The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the command for the number of reserved balls for display. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the notification process (S909) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 29. FIG. First, FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing this notification process (S909).

The notification process (S909) is a process that is executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 22). When it continues for one second or more, prefetching processing is executed, and when a big win exists in the variable performance being executed or held, a big win notification image for notifying that effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加display.

Specifically, first, a notification button determination process is performed to determine whether or not the notification button 23 has been pressed (S1201). Execution determination processing is executed (S1202). In the notification execution determination process, when it is determined that the pressing operation of the notification button 23 has been continued for one second or longer, the execution of displaying the jackpot notification image is started and the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated. . Details of the notification button determination process and the notification execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), respectively.

Next, a ball hitting stop determination process for determining whether or not the hitting of the ball to the game area of the game board 13 is stopped is executed (S1203). Details of the ball hitting stop determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, notification display setting processing is executed (S1204). In the notification display setting process, when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is continued for one second or more, the variable performance being executed becomes a big win, or there is a variable performance that becomes a big win among the pending variable performances. If it is determined that the variable performance being executed becomes a big hit, or if it is determined that there is a variable performance that becomes a big hit in the pending variable performance, a big hit notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Execute the control to display. In addition, in the notification display setting process, when the big hit notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the hitting of the ball to the game area of the game board 13 is stopped, the remainder of the variable effect being executed is displayed. It also executes control for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a variable time notification image that displays the variable time and each variable time of the pending variable effect. Details of the notification display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the notification button disable canceling process is executed (S1206). In the notification button invalidation canceling process, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 invalidated by the notification execution determination process (S1202) is canceled on the condition that execution of all pending variation effects is completed. processing. Refer to FIG. 29 for details of the notification button invalidation canceling process. When the notification button invalidation canceling process ends, the notification process ends and the process returns to the main process.

Next, details of the notification button determination process (S1201), which is one process of the notification process, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26(a) is a flowchart showing the notification button determination process.

In the notification button determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification button invalid flag 223h is ON (S1301). If the notification button invalidation flag 223h is off (S1301: No), it means that it is not a period during which the effect operation of the notification button 23 is disabled. S1302). As a result, if the notification execution flag 223d is off (S1302: No), it means that the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed. (S1303).

If the notification button 23 is pressed (S1303: Yes), the notification button ON counter 223c is incremented by 1 (S1304), the notification button determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process.

Here, the notification process in which the notification button determination process is executed is a process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process. When the notification button 23 is continuously pressed in a situation where the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed, instead of the period during which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated by the processing of S1301 to S1304. Then, the notification button on-counter 223c counts the duration of the pressing operation in units of 1 millisecond.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the notification button 23 has not been pressed (not turned on) (S1303: No), the notification button ON counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S1305), and the notification button determination process ends. , return to notification processing. As a result, when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is interrupted in less than one second (when the player releases the pressing operation of the notification button 23 in less than one second), the notification button ON counter 223c is initialized to 0. Therefore, when the notification button 23 is pressed again, the duration of the pressing operation can be correctly counted again by the notification button ON counter 223c.

In addition, when it is determined that the notification button invalid flag 223h is ON as a result of the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), and when it is determined that the notification execution flag 223d is ON as a result of the processing of S1302 (S1302: Yes). , S1305, the notification button on-counter 223c is initialized to 0, the notification button determination processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the notification processing.

When the notification button invalidation flag 223h is ON, the notification button ON counter 223c does not count up, so that the pressing operation of the notification button 23 can be invalidated. Further, in this case, by initializing the notification button on-counter 223c to 0, when the notification button 23 is pressed after the invalid period of the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is canceled, the pressing operation is canceled. The duration can be correctly recounted by the notification button on counter 223c.

Further, even when the notification execution flag 223d is ON, by initializing the notification button ON counter 223c to 0, the notification button 23 is pressed again after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is completed. In this case, the duration of the pressing operation can be correctly re-counted by the notification button on-counter 223c.

Next, details of the notification execution determination process (S1202), which is one process of the notification process, will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b). FIG. 26(b) is a flowchart showing the notification execution determination process.

In the notification execution determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification button on-counter 223c is 1000 or more (S1311). If the notification button on-counter 223c is less than 1000 (S1311: No), the notification execution determination process is terminated and the notification process is returned to.

On the other hand, when the notification button ON counter 223c is 1000 or more (S1311: Yes), the notification execution flag 223d is set to ON (S1312), and the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to ON (S1313). As a result, when the notification button 23 is pressed by the player continuously for 1000 milliseconds or longer, that is, for one second or longer, the notification execution flag 223d is set to ON, thereby causing the notification button 23 to be pressed. Execution of the notification based on the operation is initiated.

In other words, unless the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (one second), it is not notified whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win among the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held. Unless there are special circumstances, such as when you want to stop the game and leave the seat, or when you want to finish a call or e-mail on a mobile phone, etc. If it is known whether or not one of them will result in a big win before the pending variable performance is executed, the enjoyment of the game is conversely deprived. By notifying whether or not there is a variable performance that will be a big hit in the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held for the first time after the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), the player can When the notification button 23 is unintentionally touched and the touched time is less than a predetermined time, it is determined whether or not a big win is included in either the variable performance being executed or the variable performance being held. , can be suppressed from being known to the player.

Further, when the notice button invalidation flag 223h is turned on by the process of S1313, and the notice based on the depression operation of the notice button 23 is executed, the depression operation of the notice button 23 is invalidated. As will be described later, the invalidation of the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is continued until the execution of all the variable effects including the reserved part is completed in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁As a result, according to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, for example, when the player leaves the gaming machine, even if someone other than the player presses the notification button 23, at least the pachinko machine In 10, until the execution of all variable performances including reserved parts is completed, it is possible to make it impossible for persons other than the player to grasp whether or not there is a variable performance for a big win. Therefore, the interests of the original players can be protected.

Next, the notification button ON counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S1314). Then, the notification execution counter 223e is initialized to 0 (S1315) to prepare for the counting of the notification execution time based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the notification execution determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process.

Next, details of the ball hitting stop determination process (S1203), which is one process of the notification process, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the ball hitting stop determination process (S1203).

In the ball hitting stop determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball hitting stop flag 223g is off and the ball undetected counter 223f is 5000 or more (S1321). If the ball undetected counter 223f is 5000 or more, the ball hitting stop flag 223g is set to ON (S1322), and the process proceeds to S1323.

When the ball hitting stop flag 223g is off and the ball non-detection counter 223f is 5000 or more, it is determined that the hitting of the ball has not stopped. It means that the ball has not entered the ball entry hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, or the out hole 66 for five seconds or more. As described above, the general winning port 63, the first ball-entering port 64, the specific winning port 65a, and the out-port 66 discharge balls guided to the game area by the ball launching unit 112a out of the game area. These are all the openings that are played and the openings through which the ball is ejected out of the playing area. In other words, if the ball is not entered into these openings for 5 seconds or longer, it means that the ball is not being hit into the game area by the ball shooting unit 112a.

In the process of S1322, in such a case, by setting the ball hitting stop flag 223g to ON, the hitting of the ball by the ball shooting unit 112a that shoots the ball toward the game area of the game board 13 is stopped. indicates that The ball hitting stop flag 223g is referred to in the notification display setting process, which will be described later.

As a result of the process of S1312, if the ball hitting stop flag 223g is ON or the ball non-detection counter 223f is less than 5000 (S1321: No), the process proceeds to S1323.

In the processing of S1323, it is determined whether or not any of the general winning opening switch, the first ball entrance switch, the specific winning opening switch, and the out opening switch is ON (S1323). As a result, if it is determined that any one of the general winning slot switch, the first ball slot switch, the specific winning slot switch, and the out slot switch is ON (S1323: Yes), the general winning slot 63, the 1 The ball enters any one of the ball entry hole 64, the specific prize winning hole 65a, or the out hole 66, and the ball is launched by the ball shooting unit 112a that shoots the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. Since it means that there was a hit, the ball hitting stop flag 223g is first set to OFF (S1324), and the ball non-detection counter 223f is initialized to 0 (S1325). Then, the ball hitting stop determination processing ends. By initializing the undetected ball counter 223f to 0, it is again possible to count the time during which no ball is detected entering the general winning hole 63, the first ball entering hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, or the out hole 66. there is

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1323, if it is determined that all of the general winning opening switch, the first ball opening switch, the specific winning opening switch, and the out opening switch are off (S1323: No), then, It is determined whether or not the ball hitting stop flag 223g is on (S1326), and if the ball hitting stop flag 223g is off (S1326: No), 1 is added to the ball undetected counter 223f (S1327). Here, the notification process in which the ball hitting stop determination process is executed is a process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process. Therefore, by executing the process of S1327, it is determined that the hitting of the ball has not stopped, and the general winning hole 63, the first ball entering hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, and the out hole 66 The time without ball entry can be counted every millisecond by using the ball undetected counter 223f. When the process of S1327 ends, the ball hitting stop determination process ends, and the process returns to the notification process.

On the other hand, if the ball hitting stop flag 223g is turned on as a result of the process of S1326 (S1326: Yes), the ball hitting stop determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process. As a result, in the state where it is determined that the ball has stopped hitting, if there is no ball entering the general winning hole 63, the first ball entering hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, or the out hole 66, the ball Since the value of the non-detection counter 223f holds a value of 5000 or more, when the ball hitting stop determination process is executed in the notification process executed 1 millisecond later, the processes of S1321 and S1322 Subsequently, the ball hitting stop flag 223g can be set to ON.

Next, details of the notification display setting process (S1204), which is one process of the notification process, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the notification display setting process (S1204).

In the notification display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification execution flag 223d is on (S1331). Since no operation has been performed and the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed, the notification display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process.

On the other hand, if the notification execution flag 223d is ON (S1331: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot effect or the demonstration effect is in progress (S1332). Then, in the case of the jackpot effect or the demonstration effect (S1332: Yes), the notification display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. As a result, even when the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for one second or more and a notification is made based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the jackpot effect or the demonstration effect is performed. , the notification is not executed. Therefore, when the big win effect is being performed, the player can be made to concentrate on the big win. In addition, when the demonstration effect is being performed, it is a situation where the variable effect is not performed for a predetermined time or more, there is no suspended variable effect, and notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is unnecessary. . Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to prevent wasteful execution of the notification process.

Here, it is determined based on the command received from the main controller 110 whether the jackpot effect or the demonstration effect is being performed. For example, after receiving the opening command transmitted from the main controller 110 when starting the opening effect of the jackpot, receiving the ending command transmitted from the main controller 110 when starting the ending effect of the jackpot. A period until the end of the ending performance is judged to be during the jackpot performance. Also, it is determined that the demonstration performance is being performed during the period from when the demonstration command instructing the start of the demonstration performance is received from the main controller 110 to when the variation pattern command is received next.

It should be noted that during the jackpot effect, the notification may be made based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, and in this case, in the process of S1332, it may be determined only whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. . In this case, the player can confirm whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win in the pending variable performance during the big win performance, so whether the player can leave the seat or complete the business after the current big win is over. Whether or not can be determined in advance during the big hit performance.

In addition, in the processing of S1332, it may be determined only whether or not the jackpot effect is being performed. In this case, the processing for performing the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 during the demonstration effect is wastefully executed. However, since the step of determining whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed is not required, the program for the notification display setting process can be made smaller. Also, the processing of S1332 may be omitted.

In the processing of S1332, if neither the big win effect nor the demonstration effect is being performed (S1332: No), then the value of the notification execution counter 223e is divided by 1000, and it is determined whether the remainder is 0 (S1333). Here, the notification execution counter 223e is initialized to 0 when the notification execution flag 223d is turned on, and is incremented by 1 every second as described later. Therefore, in the processing of S1333, it is determined that the remainder obtained by dividing the value of the notification execution counter 223e by 1000 is 0 (S1333: Yes) immediately after the notification execution flag 223d is turned on and is turned on, and the pre-reading process is executed at this timing (S1334). On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1333, if the remainder obtained by dividing the value of the notification execution counter 223e by 1000 is not 0 (S1333: No), the notification display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the notification process.

In the look-ahead processing of S1334, out of the look-ahead information first to fourth areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 or the like stored in each area where the variable effect is reserved is read-ahead. Then, it is determined whether or not a big win is achieved in the variable performance. The number of pending variable effects (number of pending balls) is determined from the value of the pending ball number counter 223a. Further, in the pre-reading process performed in the notification process, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 or the like stored in the pre-reading information 0th area is also read out, and it is determined whether or not the variable performance being executed becomes a big win.

Next, as a result of the look-ahead processing, it is determined whether there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the pending variable effects or whether the variable effect being executed will be a big hit (S1335). If it is determined that there is no variation effect that will result in a big hit in , and it is determined that the variation effect that is being executed will not result in a big win (no) (S1335: No), the notification display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. .

On the other hand, as a result of the look-ahead processing, if there is a variation effect that will be a big hit in the pending variable effect, or if it is determined that the variable effect that is being executed will be a big hit (S1335: Yes), a jackpot notification command is issued. Set (S1336). The jackpot notification command is a command for the display control device 114 to display the jackpot notification image shown in FIG. If it is determined in the look-ahead processing that there is such a variation effect, it includes information for specifying the number of times of suspension of the variation effect that will be a big hit (reserved ball that will be a big hit).

The jackpot notification command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. By transmitting the jackpot notification command to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 changes the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third pattern display device 81 from normal black to gold. By doing so, the control for displaying the jackpot notification image is executed.

In this way, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held during the time when the player presses the notification button 23 for one second or more and the notification is made based on the pressing operation. This is an image displayed when there is a variation effect that results in a big win. If neither the variable performance being executed nor the variable performance being held has a variable performance that will result in a big win, the big win notification image is not displayed, and the color of the boy's hair HB in the small area Ds2 remains black. Therefore, the player presses the notification button 23 for one second or longer, and confirms whether the color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 remains black or changes to gold. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win in the variable performance and the pending variable performance. Therefore, when the player wants to stop the game and leave the seat, or when he/she wants to complete a task such as a call or an e-mail using a mobile phone, he/she presses the notification button 23 continuously for one second or more to indicate that the game is being executed. In order to know whether there is a variable performance that will be a big hit in the variable performance and the pending variable performance, and if there is no variable performance that will be a big hit, the game The player can make a decision to stop immediately. In addition, if there is a variable performance that results in a big win, the player can decide to continue the game until a big win is achieved. In other words, with this notice button 23, when the player wants to leave the room or finish his/her business, it can be determined whether or not the action can be executed immediately.

In the process of S1337 following the process of S1336, it is determined whether or not the ball hitting stop flag 223g is on (S1337). and return to notification processing. On the other hand, if the ball hitting stop flag 223g is ON (S1337: Yes), first, the remaining variation time (the remaining variation time from that point until the end of the variation presentation) is calculated in the variation presentation being executed. (S1338). The remaining variation time of the variation effect being executed is determined from the variation time determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the variation pattern command. It is calculated by subtracting the elapsed time from the start of the variable effect being executed.

Next, for the pending variable effects, the variable time is calculated for each variable effect (S1339). Each variable time of the pending variable effect is calculated based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b. In this embodiment, the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, when the jackpot lottery is performed). Therefore, when calculating each variable time of the pending variable effect, based on the value of the pending ball number counter 223a at the time of calculation, when the execution of each pending variable effect is started, the number of pending balls It is done after calculating how many is.

Then, a variable time notification command is set (S1340), the notification display setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process. The variable time notification command is for notifying the display control device 114 of the remaining variable time of the variable effect being executed calculated in the process of S1338 and each variable time of the pending variable effect calculated in the process of S1339. is a command. The variable time notification command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing.

When the variable time notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the variable time notification image shown in FIG. Control is performed by the display control device 114 so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the jackpot notification image. By displaying this fluctuation time notice image together with the big win notice image on the third symbol display device 81, the player not only grasps whether or not there is a fluctuation effect that will result in a big win, but also a big win in the near future. You can keep track of how long it takes. Therefore, the player can quickly determine whether or not he/she has time to leave the seat or finish his/her business, taking into account the time until the next big win.

In addition, since the variable time (remaining variable time in the variable performance being executed) is displayed for each variable performance until the latest jackpot, the player can check which variable performance is being executed. It is also possible to make decisions such as whether to leave the room or finish the business.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable time notification image is displayed together with the big win notification image only when it is determined that the ball has stopped hitting the game area. This is because, as described above, when calculating each variable time of the pending variable effect, there is no possibility of winning the first ball entrance 64, so the number of pending balls does not change. Even if the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the performance starts (strictly, when the jackpot lottery is held), each variable time of the pending variable performance is guaranteed. This is because it can be calculated as Conversely, in the present embodiment, unless it is determined that the hitting of the ball into the game area is stopped, the variable time notification image is not displayed together with the jackpot notification image. Therefore, since the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to suppress the display of the inaccurate variable time for the pending variable performance, so that the player can leave the seat or finish the business. It is possible to suppress erroneous determination as to whether there is time.

In addition, even if the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, it is assumed that there will be no prize winning to the first ball entrance 64 (no new suspension of the variable effect). Each variable time of the variable effect may be calculated and a variable time notification image may be displayed. As a result, even if the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to judge whether or not there is time for the player to leave the seat or complete the business by predicting the time until the player gets a big win to some extent. can be done. In this case, while the ball is not stopped, a character such as "(forecast)" is written to the right of each variable time of the pending variable effect displayed in the variable time notification image, or the pending It is also possible to darken the brightness of the letters of each variable time of the , so that the player can understand that each value is based on assumptions. Then, if it is determined that the ball has stopped hitting, the characters "(expected)" are erased, or the brightness of the characters is displayed brightly, and the pending display displayed in the variable time notification image It may be indicated so that the player can understand that each variable time of the variable effect is an accurate value.

In addition, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the variable effect determined at the time of starting the variable effect is determined regardless of the number of pending balls at that time, the hitting of the ball to the game area is stopped. Even if it is not, each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect can be correctly calculated by the look-ahead process. Therefore, in this case, by omitting the processing of S1337 and executing the processing of S1338 to S1340 after the processing of S1336, regardless of whether or not the hitting of the ball to the game area is stopped, the jackpot When the notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variable time notification image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time.

Next, details of the notification stop determination process (S1205), which is one process of the notification process, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a flowchart showing the notification stop determination process (S1205).

In the notification stop determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification execution flag 223d is ON (S1351). back to On the other hand, if the notification execution flag 223d is ON (S1351: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the notification execution counter 223e is 5000 (S1352).

If the notification execution counter 223e is not 5000 (S1352: No), 1 is added to the notification execution counter 223e (S1355), the notification stop determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process. By the processing of S1355, while the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is being executed, the notification execution counter 223e is incremented by 1 until the value of the notification execution counter 223e reaches 5000 after the execution is started. . Here, the notification process in which the notification stop determination process is executed is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process. For 5000 milliseconds (5 seconds), the notification execution counter 223e counts every millisecond.

As a result of the process of S1352, if the notification execution counter 223e is 5000 (S1352: Yes), the notification stop command is set (S1353), the notification execution flag 223d is set off (S1354), and the notification stop determination process is started. End and return to notification processing. When the execution of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 continues for 5 seconds by the processing of S1353 and S1354, the execution of the notification ends.

In addition, the notification stop command notifies the display control device 114 of the stop of the execution of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, and the jackpot notification image indicating the existence of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the fluctuation time This is a command for ending the display of the notification image. The notification stop command set by the process of S1353 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. In the display control device 114, by receiving the notice stop command, when the third pattern display device displays the big win notice image or the fluctuation time notice image, the display of these images is stopped.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29B, the details of the notification button invalidation canceling process (S1206) will be described. FIG. 29(b) is a flow chart showing the notification button disable cancellation process (S1206).

In the notification button invalidation cancellation process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification button invalidation flag 223h is ON (S1361). If the notification button invalidation flag 223h is off (S1361: No), it is not the invalidation period of the pressing operation of the notification button 23, so the notification button invalidation canceling process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. On the other hand, if the notification button invalid flag 223h is on (S1361: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation command flag 223i is on (S1362).

If the confirmation command flag 223i is off (S1362: No), the notification button disable canceling process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. On the other hand, if the fixed command flag 223i is ON (S1362: Yes), the fixed command flag 223i is set to OFF (S1363), and then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number counter 223a is 0 (S1364). As a result, if the number of pending balls counter 223a is not 0 (S1364: No), the notification button invalidation canceling process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls counter 223a is 0 (S1364: Yes), the notification button invalidation flag 223h is set to OFF (S12364), the notification button invalidation canceling process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process.

Here, if the determination command flag 223i is ON, that is, when the determination command is received from the main control device 110, the suspension number counter 223a is 0, it means that the execution of all the variable effects including the suspension is completed. , means that the pending variable effect has become 0. That is, in the present embodiment, after the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is set to be disabled, all variable effects including the pending portion (including the variable effect that is suspended after being set to be disabled) When the execution is finished and the pending variable effect disappears, the notification button invalidation flag 223h is set to OFF, and the invalidation of the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is cancelled.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is disabled until the pending variable effect becomes zero. In other words, even if the notification button 23 is pressed during that period, the notification is not executed. As a result, according to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, for example, when the player leaves the game machine, even if someone other than the player presses the notification button 23, at least the pachinko machine In 10, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win for a person other than the player until the pending variable performance becomes 0. Therefore, the interests of the original players can be protected.

Next, each process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 40. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and V interrupt signal that the MPU 231 detects. There is a V-interrupt process that is executed when the The V interrupt signal is a signal that the image controller 237 transmits to the MPU 231, and the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. do.

The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 30(a). FIG. 30(a) is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S1401). Specifically, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 .

Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

After the process of S1401, interrupt permission is set (S1402), and thereafter the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 30(b). FIG. 30(b) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing (S1602) of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 30(c). FIG. 30(c) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 13) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. By executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. . Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an overview of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt process, command determination processing (S1602) is first executed, and then display setting processing (S1603) is executed. In the command determination process (S1602), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, if a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a detailed variation pattern is determined according to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command, and the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the The variable display data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start the variable effect, there is a high possibility that the variable pattern command for display, the stop type command for display, and the like will be stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode of the variable performance selected by the main controller 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, and display the performance image corresponding to the mode in the third mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34. FIG.

In the display setting process (S1603), based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b by the command determination process (S1602), the address indicated by the pointer 233c is specified. According to the drawn content, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specifically specified.

In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, task processing is executed (S1604). In this task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S1603), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S1605). In this drawing process, a drawing list shown in FIG. 13 is generated from the types of various sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, which are determined in task processing (S1604). It is transmitted to the image controller 237 . As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1606). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S1606, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front-back off reach, front-back off A stop type table and a stop type counter corresponding to "ready-to-win" and "completely out" are compared, and the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34, the details of the command determination process (S1402), which is one process of the V interrupt process, will be described. First, FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing. Command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 .

In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S1701). Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S1701: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S1603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S1702). All unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S1703).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a command for the number of reserved balls for display (S1704), and if there is a command for the number of reserved balls for display (S1704: Yes), the command for the number of reserved balls is processed. is executed (S1705), and the process returns to S1701.

Here, with reference to FIG. 32(a), the details of the pending ball count command process (S1705) will be described. FIG. 32(a) is a flow chart showing the pending pitch command process. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the pending ball number command process, first, the new pending ball number command flag is turned on (S1801). The new pending ball number command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1603) that the display pending ball number command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the pending ball number information included in the pending ball number command for display is acquired (S1802). In addition, in the process of S1802, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is acquired from the last stored display reserved ball number command. This makes it possible to acquire the latest information on the number of pending balls.

Then, among the number discrimination flags provided for each number of held balls, the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of held balls acquired in the process of S1802 is turned on, and the number discrimination flag corresponding to the other number of held balls is turned off. (S1803) and returns to the command determination process. In the display setting process, when the new pending ball number command flag is on, by referring to the number discrimination flag, the number of pending ball patterns for the number of pending balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag set to ON is displayed. The reserved image data is expanded so as to be displayed in the number display area Db.

Returning to FIG. 31, in the process of S1704, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of pending balls for display (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a determination command for display among the unprocessed commands. (S1706), and if there is a confirmation command for display (S1706: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S1707), and the process returns to S1701.

Details of the confirmation command process (S1707) will now be described with reference to FIG. 32(b). FIG. 32(b) is a flow chart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command processing is to execute the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the fixed command process (S1707), the fixed command flag is set to ON (S1811), and the process ends. The confirmation command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1603) that the confirmation command for display has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the fixed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the fixed display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. . Further, after processing the setting of the display of the variable performance, when the determination command flag is not turned on even after the performance time set for the variable performance has passed, the restart performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Display setting processing is executed as follows.

Returning to FIG. 31, if it is determined in the process of S1706 that there is no display confirmation command (S1706: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( S1708), if there is a display demo command (S1708: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S1709), and the process returns to S1701.

Details of the demonstration command processing (S1709) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32(c) is a flowchart showing demo command processing. This demonstration command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display demonstration command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the demonstration command process (S1709), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S1821). Next, Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233b to clear its contents (S1822).

Next, the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect displayed in the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233e (S1823), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1824). Then, the fixed command flag is set to OFF, the demonstration display flag is set to ON, and the fixed display flag is set to OFF (S1825), and the process returns to the command determination process. Incidentally, the demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state. The fixed display flag is a flag indicating that a fixed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state.

By executing this demonstration command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S1824, the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S1821 is updated. , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Further, in the display setting process, the timer counter 233e to which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S1823 is used to measure the time of the demonstration effect defined in the demonstration display data table, and the process of S1825 is performed. Based on the states of the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag set by the display setting control timing counter 233e, when it is determined that the demonstration effect in the demonstration display data table has ended, the effect to be displayed next , control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

Further, when the execution of the command determination process is started, if both the confirmed command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area, the confirmed command process (S1707) described above is executed first, and the confirmed command flag is turned on. This demo command process (S1709) is then executed, and the fixed command flag is turned off by the process of S1825.

Accordingly, in such a case, the demonstration effect is displayed without performing the fixed display effect. Main controller 110 is configured to transmit a demo command if the start timing of the variable effect does not come after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the confirmation command. , it is impossible for both the definite command and the demo command to be stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process. Therefore, if all of these commands are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, there is a high possibility that command transmission/reception is not performed normally.

In such a case, the display control device 114 preferentially displays the demonstration effects that are not directly related to the game on the third symbol display device 81, so that the erroneous finalized display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the game result. In addition, by starting the demonstration effect without executing the confirmation display effect, the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call the hall staff and request a countermeasure.

Returning to FIG. 31, in the process of S1708, if it is determined that there is no display demo command (S1708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S1710), if there is a variation pattern command for display (S1710: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S1711), and the process returns to S1701.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S1711) will be described with reference to FIG. 33(a). FIG. 33(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, based on the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the display variation pattern command, one detailed variation pattern is selected from among a plurality of detailed variation patterns in which the variation effect is executed in the variation time. A variation pattern is determined (S1831). The detailed variation pattern determined here uniquely determines the content of the advance notice effect performed during the variation effect.

Next, for the determined details, the variable display data table corresponding to the variable pattern is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S1832).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is also the risk of being interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S1832, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time The table is set in the display data table buffer 233a.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233a, the variation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control. If instructed by the device 110, the determination command (display determination command ) is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233a, the display data table that is actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if a variable effect having a variable time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233a is completed, the determination command from the main controller 110 is issued. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display confirmation command) is received, the player can visually recognize the restart effect as part of the variable effect. , the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 can be continued without discomfort until the stop display of the third pattern is confirmed.

Next, the content is cleared by writing Null data into the additional data table buffer 233b (S1833). Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for fluctuation set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S1832, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233e (S1834). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1835), and the determination command flag, demo display flag, and determination display flag are all set to OFF (S1836).

By setting the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag to OFF, it is possible to display a variable production on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the demonstration production and the fixed display production being displayed. Further, when the execution of the command determination process is started, if both the fixed command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area, the above-described fixed command process (S1707) is executed first, and the fixed command flag is set to ON, then this variation pattern command process (S1711) is executed, and the fixed command flag is turned OFF by the process of S1836.

When the process of S1836 is completed, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S1837), and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S1835, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S1832 , the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233e to which the variable time data is set by the process of S1834 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and the variable effect in the variable display data table is measured. When it is determined that is completed, the third symbol display device 81 displays a finalized display performance when a finalized command (displayed finalized command) from the main control device 110 is received. Also, if the determination command (determination command for display) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the completion of the variable performance, the setting of the display is controlled so as to display the restart performance on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

Here, if both the fixed command for display and the fluctuation pattern command for display are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the fixed command for display, Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since it is first determined whether there is a confirmation command for display, the confirmation command process corresponding to the confirmation command for display is always executed first. A process corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command for is executed later, and as in the process of S1836, the fixed command flag set by the display fixed command can be set to OFF by overwriting. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display determination command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be preferentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, the display Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence or absence of the display demo command is determined first, the demo command process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first. A process corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed later, and as in the process of S1832, the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the variation display data table by overwriting. can be done. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demonstration command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be preferentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 31, in the processing of S1710, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S1710: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. (S1712), and if there is a stop type command for display (S1712: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S1713), and the process returns to S1701.

Details of the stop type command process (S1713) will now be described with reference to FIG. 33(b). FIG. 33(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process is for executing a process corresponding to the stop type command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front-rear off reach, reach other than front-back off, or complete off) Corresponds to. A stop type table is determined (S1841), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 30(c)) is executed. Finally, the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the pattern display device 81 is set (S1842).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the stop symbols set by the process of S1842 are turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to off (S1843) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the display data table for variation, the process of S1842 is used as the type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the drawing contents corresponding to the address after the predetermined time. Offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by is described. In the above-described task processing (S1604), after the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S1842 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S1843, and the specified symbol is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S1841, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S1842. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined by assuming that the stop type is a special stop symbol even if the stop type is completely out.

Here, if a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the stop symbol of the big win even if it is out. , there is a possibility that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered because the player misunderstands that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a big win. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 if the jackpot is won. Also, since the game state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 31, in the processing of S1712, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S1712: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot notification command in the unprocessed commands ( S1714), if there is a jackpot notification command (S1714: Yes), the jackpot notification command process is executed (S1715), and the process returns to S1701.

Here, with reference to FIG. 34(a), the details of the jackpot notification command process (S1715) will be described. FIG. 34(a) is a flow chart showing a jackpot notification command process. In this jackpot notification command processing, processing corresponding to the jackpot notification command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the jackpot notification command, first, the jackpot notification command flag is set to ON (S1851). Here, the jackpot notification command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1603) that the jackpot notification command has been processed in the ON state.

Next, information for specifying a held ball that will be a big hit in the big hit notification command is acquired (S1852). Then, with respect to the held ball jackpot flag provided for each held ball and indicating that the held ball will be a big hit when it is on, it corresponds to the held ball that will be the big hit, which is specified from the information acquired by the processing of S1852. The reserved ball big hit flags corresponding to the other reserved balls are set to off (S1853), and the process returns to the command determination process.

In addition, in the process of S1852, if the big hit notification command does not include the information specifying the held ball that will be the big hit, it means that the variation effect being executed will be the big hit. Therefore, in this case, in the process of S1853, the held ball jackpot flags corresponding to all the held balls are set to OFF.

In the display setting process, when the jackpot notification command is ON, a jackpot notification image indicating the existence of a jackpot (an image of a boy whose hair HB is "golden") is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third pattern display device 81. The image data for jackpot announcement is expanded as shown in FIG. At the same time, based on the reserved ball big hit flag, the reserved image data for big win is developed so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball to be the big hit is displayed in "red" in the reserved ball number display area Db.

Returning to FIG. 31, in the process of S1714, if it is determined that there is no jackpot notification command (S1714: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a variable time notification command in the unprocessed commands (S1716 ), if there is a variable time notification command (S1716: Yes), the variable time notification command process is executed (S1717), and the process returns to S1701.

Details of the variable time notification command process (S1717) will now be described with reference to FIG. 34(b). FIG. 34(b) is a flow chart showing the variable time notification command process. This variable time notification command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the variable time notification command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the variable time notification command, first, the variable time notification command flag is set to ON (S1861). Here, the variable time notification command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1603) that the variable time notification command has been processed in the ON state.

Next, from the information included in the variable time notification command, the remaining variable time of the variable performance being executed and each variable time of the pending variable performance are acquired, stored in the work RAM 233 (S1862), and command determination processing is performed. back to

In the display setting process, when the variable time notification command is ON, a variable time notification image displaying the remaining time of the variable performance being executed and each variable time of the pending variable performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The variable time notification image data is expanded so as to be displayed in the small area Ds3.

Returning to FIG. 31, if it is determined in the processing of S1716 that there is no variable time notification command (S1716: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a notification stop command among the unprocessed commands (S1718). ), if there is a notification stop command (S1718: Yes), the notification stop command process is executed (S1719), and the process returns to S1701.

Details of the notification stop command process (S1719) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34(c) is a flowchart showing notification stop command processing. This notice stop command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the notice stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the notification stop command, the notification stop command flag is set to ON (S1871), and the process returns to the notification command. Here, the notification stop command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1603) that the notification stop command has been processed in the ON state. In the display setting process, when the notification stop command is ON, the jackpot that has been expanded in order to erase (hide) the jackpot notification image and the fluctuation time notification image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The notification image data, the jackpot reservation image data, and the variable time notification image data are erased.

Returning to FIG. 31, in the process of S1718, if it is determined that there is no notification stop command (S1718: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S1722), and the process returns to the process of S1701. . In the process of S1722, for example, if a continuous notice command instructing the start of the continuous notice effect is received from the sound lamp control device 113, an additional data table corresponding to the form of the continuous notice effect indicated by the command is added. It reads from the data table storage area 232b and stores it in the additional data table buffer 233b. As a result, in the display setting process, the continuous announcement effect is displayed in the third pattern according to the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b for the image displayed in accordance with the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Execute the control displayed on the device 81 .

In the process of S1701, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S1701: Yes ), and the processing of S1702 to S1722 is executed again. Then, the processes of S1701 to S1722 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. ), the command determination process is terminated.

Next, details of the display setting process (S1603), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 39. FIG. First, FIGS. 35 and 36 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 35, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S1901). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, the processing of S1902 to S1910 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1911. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S1901: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S1902), S1903- Each process of S1910 executes the process corresponding to the new command.

In the process of S1903, it is determined whether or not the new pending ball number command flag is on (S1903), and if the new pending ball number command flag is ON (S1903: Yes), It is determined that the reserved ball number command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S1904).

Here, the details of the pending image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37(a) is a flowchart showing the pending image setting process. This pending image setting process causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the number of pending balls patterns corresponding to the number of pending balls notified by the voice lamp control device 113 in accordance with the processing of the command for the number of pending balls for display. Therefore, the processing is to expand the image data.

In the pending image setting process, first, the number discrimination flag is referred to, and the number of pending balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag set to ON is displayed in the number of pending balls display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 ( 4) is developed (S1951). In the task processing (S1604), based on the developed pending image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the pending image are specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

In the pending image setting process, after the process of S1951, the new pending ball number command is set to OFF (S1952), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 35, after the pending image setting process (S1904) or in the process of S1903, when it is determined that the new pending ball number command flag is off (S1903: No), then the jackpot notification command flag is It is determined whether it is on (S1905), and if the jackpot notification command flag is on (S1905: Yes), it is determined that the jackpot notification command has been processed in the preceding command determination processing, and the jackpot notification image setting processing is executed. (S1906).

Here, the details of the jackpot notification image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 37(b). FIG. 37(b) is a flowchart showing a jackpot notification image setting process. This jackpot notification image setting process is for developing the image data in order to display the jackpot notification image shown in FIG. is the processing of

In the jackpot notification image setting process, first, as a jackpot notification image indicating the existence of a jackpot, an image of a boy whose hair HB is "golden" is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third pattern display device 81. Image data is expanded (S1961). In the task processing (S1604), based on the expanded jackpot notification image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the jackpot notification image is specified as "a boy whose hair HB is 'golden'". Instead of "a boy whose hair HB is black" defined in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, Various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle for displaying the boy whose color is “golden” are determined.

Next, referring to the retained ball jackpot flag provided for each retained ball, the jackpot retained image data for displaying the retained ball number pattern of the retained ball corresponding to the retained ball jackpot flag set to ON in "red". is expanded (S1962). In the task processing (S1604), based on the developed jackpot pending image data, the "red" pending ball number pattern is specified as the type of sprite (display object), and the "blue" pending ball number pattern is specified. Instead, it determines various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle for displaying the reserved ball number pattern of the target reserved ball in "red".

In the processing of S1962, if the reserved ball jackpot flags corresponding to all the reserved balls are off, the variable effect being executed is a jackpot, so the jackpot reserved image data is not expanded, and the Go to processing.

After the process of S1962, the jackpot notification command flag is set to OFF (S1963), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 35, after the jackpot notification image setting process (S1906) or in the process of S1905, when it is determined that the jackpot notification command flag is off (S1905: No), then the fluctuation time notification command flag is It is determined whether or not it is on (S1907). If the variable time notification command flag is ON (S1907: Yes), it is determined that the variable time notification command has been processed in the preceding command determination processing, and the variable time notification image setting processing is executed (S1908).

Here, the details of the variable time notification image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38(a) is a flow chart showing the variable time notification image setting process. In this variable time notification image setting process, in accordance with the processing of the variable time notification command, the image data of the variable time notification image shown in FIG. This is processing for expansion.

In the variable time notification image setting process, first, the remaining variable time of the variable effect being executed and each variable time of the pending variable effect, which are stored in the work RAM 233 by processing the variable time notification command, are referred to. Image data for variable time notification is developed for displaying a variable time notification image displaying the remaining time of the variable performance being executed and each variable time of the pending variable performance in the small area Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81. (S1966). Then, the notification stop command flag is set to OFF (S1967), and the process returns to the display setting process.

In task processing (S1604), based on the image data for variable time notification developed by the processing of S1966, the type of sprite (display object) forming the variable time notification image is specified. Then, instead of the sprite displayed in the small area Ds3 defined by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, or superimposed on the sprite. Then, in order to display the variable time notification image in the small area Ds3, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite constituting the variable time notification image.

Returning to FIG. 35, after the variable time notification image setting process (S1908) or when it is determined in the process of S1907 that the variable time notification command flag is off (S1907: No), then the notification stop command flag is on (S1909). Then, if the notification stop command flag is on (S1909: Yes), it is determined that the notification stop command has been processed in the preceding command determination processing, and the notification image deletion processing is executed (S1910).

Details of the notification image erasing process will now be described with reference to FIG. 38(b). FIG. 38(b) is a flow chart showing the notification image erasing process. This notification image erasing process is a process for erasing the jackpot notification image and the variable time notification image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the notification stop command.

In the notification image deletion process, first, the jackpot notification image data and the jackpot pending image data developed by the jackpot notification image setting process (S1906), and the variable time notification developed by the variable time notification image setting process (S1908). The image data for use is deleted (S1971). Then, the notification stop command flag is set to OFF (S1972), and the process returns to the display setting process.

By the processing of S1971, the image data for jackpot notification, the hold image data for jackpot, and the image data for notification of fluctuation time are deleted. The notification image and the variable time notification image are erased.

Returning to FIG. 35, whether the notification image erasing process (S1910) ends, whether it is determined in the process of S1909 that the notification stop command flag is turned off (S1909: No), or in the process of S1901, whether the new command If it is determined that the flag is off (S1901: No), then pointer update processing is executed (S1911).

Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process updates the pointer 233c that specifies the address at which the corresponding drawing contents should be obtained from the display data table and the additional data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. This is the process of performing

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233c (S1981). That is, the pointer 233c is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the buffer 233a, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from

After the value of the pointer 233c is updated by the process of S1981, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a is End information. is discriminated (S1982). As a result, if it is End information (S1982: Yes), it means that the pointer 233c has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table (S1983). If it is a table (S1983: Yes), the pointer 233c is set to 1 (S1984). Time data is set in the clock counter 233e (S1985), and the process proceeds to S1987. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the beginning of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 repeats the demonstration effect or the restart effect. can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1983, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is neither the demonstration display data table nor the restart display data table (S1983: No), the pointer 233c The value is decremented by 1 (S1986), and the process proceeds to S1987. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, the variable display data table or the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, , End information is always displayed at the previous address, so that the third pattern display device 81 is caused to display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

As a result of the process of S1982, if it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233c after the update by the process of S1981 is not the End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a (S1982: No ), the process of S1983 to S1986 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1987.

In the processing of S1987, it is determined whether or not the fixed command flag is on (S1987). Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is ON (S1987: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, so the display data table buffer The value of the pointer 233c is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233a (S1988), and the value of the timer counter is set to 1. (S1989) and returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content specified at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

Returning to FIG. 35, after the pointer update process (S1911), the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b are indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process. The drawing contents of the address indicated are expanded (S1912). In the task processing (S1604), the pending image developed in the pending image setting process (S1904), the jackpot notification image developed in the jackpot notification image setting process (S1906), and the variable time notification image setting process (S1908) Along with the variable time notification image developed in step S1912, based on the drawing content developed in the process of S1912, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinate position and magnification ratio are determined for each sprite. , and rotation angle.

If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, the Null data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 233b.

After the process of S1912, the value of the clock counter 233e is decremented by 1 (S1913), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233e after the subtraction is 0 or less (S1914). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233e is 1 or more (S1914: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233e is 0 or less (S1914: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is sent from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 in accordance with the end of the presentation. ) should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S1915, it is checked whether or not the determination command flag is ON (S1915).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is ON (S1915: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113. A mode of finalized display effect corresponding to the stopped symbol indicated by the symbol discrimination flag is determined, a finalized display data table of that mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b, The contents are cleared (S1916). Next, the time data corresponding to the production time of the finalized display is set in the clock counter 233e (S1917), and the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1918). Then, the determination command flag is set to OFF (S1919), and then the determination display flag indicating that the determination display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S1920). (S1921), and returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received, the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S1921 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is started from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before, in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table is started. Design offset information from the stop design of the fluctuation performance performed one before is stipulated until a predetermined time elapses after it is performed. In task processing (S1604), from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S1921, the stop symbol in the previous variation effect is specified. Then, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information defined in the variable display data table to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S1915, if the confirmation command flag is not ON but OFF (S1915: No), the process proceeds to S1922 shown in FIG. 36 to determine whether the confirmation display flag is ON (S1922). ). Then, if the fixed display flag is on (S1922: Yes), the result of determination in the process of S1914 (S1914: Yes) means that the fixed display effect has ended, so the fixed display flag is set to off. After that (S1923), the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S1924), and then the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration presentation displayed in the demonstration display data table is set in the timer counter 233e. Set (S1925). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1926), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S1927), and the display setting process ends.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received before the fixed display effect ends, The drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that the branch condition of S1922: Yes is satisfied when the confirmation display effect is performed, and in this case, the contents of the additional data table buffer 233b have been cleared by the processing of S1916. Therefore, in the process of S1924, clearing of those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced. However, the process of clearing the additional data table buffer 233b may be executed in the process of S1924.

In the processing of S1922, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S1922: No), then it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S1928). Then, if the demonstration display flag is on (S1928: Yes), the result of determination in the processing of S1914 (S1914: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended. Return to interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

On the other hand, in the process of S1928, if the demonstration display flag is not ON but OFF (S1928: No), the determination result in the process of S1914 (S1914: Yes) means that the variable effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined time has passed since the end of the variable performance, the variable display data table corresponding to the variable performance is set in the display data table buffer 233a in order to start the restart performance. At the same time, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S1929), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after addition reaches a predetermined value (S1930).

Then, if the restart timer counter does not reach the predetermined value (S1930: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. If the restart timer counter is at a predetermined value (S1930: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b, and its contents are stored. Clear (S1931). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the clock counter 233e (S1932), the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1933), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, in the display control device 114, even if a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect, the determination command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 When the (determination command for display) is not received, the drawing contents can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Then, as described above, the restart effect is a effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated. When the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the variation of is stopped, it can be recognized that the stop symbol is not determined at that time.

After the last drawing content specified by the restart display data table is developed, the drawing content is developed again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the above-described pointer updating process. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the confirmation command for display is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or the new variation pattern command for display is received. Here, the restart effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in such a manner that the third pattern is vibrated (oscillated) about a predetermined position. Only the drawing contents required to be displayed by swinging at least once are specified. By repeatedly developing the drawing contents from the top of the restart display data table, the restart effect in which the third pattern is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加In this way, the restart effect is a effect of vibrating and displaying the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81, so that the restart display data table is changed so that the third pattern is vibrated at least once. Since it is sufficient to store only the drawing contents required for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be reduced.

Further, when a display decision command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the processing of S1916 shown in FIG. 35 is performed, and the display data table buffer is executed. A fixed display data table is set in 233a. As a result, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag in accordance with the reception of the confirmation command for display even during the restart effect, and the final symbol display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can be displayed.

Further, when the display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the processing of S2832 in FIG. A variable display data table is set in the data table buffer 233a, and a variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, when the display demo command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the processing of S2821 in FIG. A demonstration display data table is set in the table buffer 233a, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁In the restart effect, even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main controller 110 that should have been originally received is not received. Since it is an effect that is displayed in the case, there is a possibility that the confirmation command will not be received even while the restart effect is being displayed due to the effects of noise, malfunction, etc. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if a display variation pattern command or a display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects in the third symbol display device 81 can be performed in accordance with the game state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, details of the drawing process (S1605), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S1604) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, and filter designation information), a drawing list shown in FIG. 13 is generated (S2001). That is, in the process of S2001, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task process (S1604). Then, the parameter necessary for the sprite determined by task processing is associated with the specified address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag (not shown) are transmitted to the image controller (S2002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag is 0, information instructing to develop the drawn image is included in the first frame buffer provided in the video RAM 236 as the drawing target buffer information. If the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the drawn image in the second frame buffer provided in the video RAM.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S2002, the rendering target buffer flag is updated (S2003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The draw target buffer flag is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". will be As a result, the drawing object buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer of the video RAM 236 each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed every time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 30(c)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read, and the image is drawn. When the processing and the display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, the second frame buffer is specified as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is displayed. A first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. . Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are specified alternately every 20 milliseconds to the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer, respectively. As a result, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the notification button 23, the variable performance being executed becomes a jackpot or the variable performance being held becomes a jackpot. To display a jackpot notification image for notifying the existence of a jackpot when there is a variable performance of a jackpot in the game. As a result, the player presses the notification button 23 and the notification image is displayed when the player wants to stop the game and leave the seat, or when the player wants to complete a task such as a call or an e-mail using a mobile phone. It can be confirmed whether or not there is a variable performance that will be a big hit in the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held. Therefore, the player can decide to immediately stop the game in order to leave the seat or complete the task if there is no variable effect that will result in a big win. In addition, if there is a variable performance that results in a big win, the player can decide to continue the game until a big win is achieved. In other words, with this notice button 23, when the player wants to leave the room or finish his/her business, it can be determined whether or not the action can be executed immediately.

Further, unless the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), it is configured not to notify whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win among the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held. ing. Unless there are special circumstances, such as when you want to stop the game and leave the seat, or when you want to finish a call or e-mail on a mobile phone, etc. If it is known whether or not one of them will result in a big win before the pending variable performance is executed, the enjoyment of the game is conversely deprived. By notifying whether or not there is a variable performance that will be a big hit in the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held for the first time after the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), the player can When the notification button 23 is unintentionally touched and the touched time is less than a predetermined time, it is determined whether or not a big win is included in either the variable performance being executed or the variable performance being held. , can be suppressed from being known to the player.

In addition, if it is determined that there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the pending variable effect, in the jackpot notification image, which variable effect is pending, that is, a pending ball that will be a big hit is configured to be notified to the player. As a result, when a player can grasp that there is a variable performance that will result in a big hit in the variable performance being executed and the variable performance that is on hold, whether the big win will come immediately or it will take some time before the big win is achieved. , In addition, it is also possible to know how many times the remaining variable performance is performed until the jackpot is achieved. Therefore, based on such information, the player can determine whether or not he/she has time to leave the table or complete his/her business before the jackpot is won.

In addition, when the player presses the notification button 23 for one second or longer and there is a variable performance that is a big win in the variable performance being executed or the variable performance being held, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Along with the jackpot notification image, a variable time notification image displaying the remaining variable time of the variable performance being executed and each variable time of the pending variable performance is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp not only whether or not there is a variation effect that will result in a big win, but also the time until the big win. Therefore, the player can quickly determine whether or not he/she has time to leave the table or finish the business, taking into account the time until the big win. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation time (remaining variation time in the variable performance being executed) is displayed for each variation performance until the big hit, so the player can see which variation performance is executed. It is also possible to make decisions such as whether to leave the room or finish the business while it is being held.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to employ other numerical values.

In the above embodiment, when there is a pressing operation of the notification button 23, if there is a big hit in the variable performance being executed or the variable performance being held, a case will be described in which the big hit notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, when there is an operation to press the notification button 23, if there is no big hit in any of the variable performances being executed and the pending variable performances (that is, even if any of the variable performances are out of ), the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a loss notification image (for example, an image in which a boy's hair HB, which is normally black, changes to white) to indicate to the player that there is no big win. good too. In the case of such a configuration, when there is a pressing operation of the notification button 23, if there is a big win in the variable performance being executed or the variable performance being held, the big win notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can be configured to As a result, when the player presses the notification button 23, depending on whether the big win notification image is displayed or the loss notification image is displayed, the variation performance being executed and the variation performance being held are selected for the big win. It is possible to grasp at a glance whether or not there is. On the other hand, when there is a pressing operation of the notification button 23, if there is no big hit in either of the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held, the failure notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When configured to display, when there is a pressing operation of the notification button 23, and there is a variable performance that is a big hit in the variable performance being executed and the variable performance on hold, it is configured not to notify anything. may As a result, when the player presses the notification button 23 and no notification is made, the player has a feeling of expectation that there will be a big win among the variable performances being executed or the variable performances being held. can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the case of displaying an image in which the color of the boy's hair HB displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed from normal black to gold is described as the jackpot notification image, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, a predetermined character may appear as the jackpot notification image, or the color and shape of the third pattern that is variably displayed (for example, the color of the wooden box and the color of the numbers displayed on the front of the wooden box) may be changed. You can change it. Also, an effect may be displayed around the third pattern, or the color of the back image or the speed at which the back image flows may be changed. Furthermore, a small jackpot notification image may be displayed in the corner of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. By displaying the big win notification image in a small size, it is possible to make it difficult for a person other than the player to visually recognize the big win notification image, and it is easy to prevent others from knowing the existence of the big win.

Also, the presence of a big hit may be notified only by the reserved number of balls pattern. In this case, the presence of a big hit may be notified by changing all the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db from the usual blue to red. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, when the variable effect with the number of times of suspension X (0≦X≦4) among the pending variable effects becomes a big hit, the number of pending balls displayed in the number of pending balls display area Db The presence of a big hit may be announced by displaying the X-th reserved ball number pattern from the left in red and the other reserved ball number patterns in blue. As a result, the player can be notified of which variable performance among the pending variable performances will result in a big win. Also, at this time, if the variable performance during execution becomes a big win, the variable performance during execution becomes a big win by displaying part or all of the reserved ball number pattern in yellow different from red or blue. The player may be notified of this.

Also, by displaying only the variable time notification image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the big win notification image, the player can be notified that there is a variation performance that will result in a big win in the variable performance being executed or the variable performance being held. may be notified to In this case, even if the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, as a result of executing the pre-reading process based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the variable effect being executed or the variable effect being held is a big hit. If there is such a variable effect, the variable time notification image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At this time, when the variation time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, when the jackpot lottery is performed), the ball is launched into the game area. If it is not stopped, the pending time cannot be calculated correctly because the number of pending balls when the variable effect is actually started is undetermined for the pending variable effect. Therefore, in this case, even if the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, it is assumed that there will be no prize winning to the first ball entrance 64 (no suspension of new variable effect). Each variable time of the pending variable effect may be calculated, and a variable time notification image may be displayed. As a result, even if the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to judge whether or not there is time for the player to leave the seat or complete the business by predicting the time until the player gets a big win to some extent. can be done. In this case, while the ball is not stopped, a character such as "(forecast)" is written to the right of each variable time of the pending variable effect displayed in the variable time notification image, or the pending It is also possible to darken the brightness of the letters of each variable time of the , so that the player can understand that each value is based on assumptions. Then, if it is determined that the ball has stopped hitting, the characters "(expected)" are erased, or the brightness of the characters is displayed brightly, and the pending display displayed in the variable time notification image It may be indicated so that the player can understand that each variable time of the variable effect is an accurate value.

In addition, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a case where the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, when the jackpot lottery is performed). If it is determined that the ball is hit to the game area at this time, it is stored in each of the look-ahead information first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b as the variation time of each pending variation effect. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the shortest variable time among the variable times that can be determined according to the number of held balls may be calculated, and the variable time notification image may be displayed. In this case, while the hitting of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "above" may be written on the right side of each variable time of the pending variable effect displayed in the variable time notification image. As a result, even if the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, at least the time it takes for the player to win the jackpot can be grasped, so it is judged whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the business. be able to.

Also, if the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), especially when the number of pending balls at that time is In the case where there is a tendency that the longer the variable time is set, the shorter the variable time, when it is determined that the ball has stopped being hit into the game area when the notification button 23 is pressed, the variable time is announced. In the image, not only the fluctuation time (current fluctuation time) of each variable effect when the state in which the ball is stopped is maintained, but also the first look-ahead information in the look-ahead information storage area 223b for each variable effect. Calculate the shortest variation time (shortest variation time) among the variation times that can be determined according to the number of held balls based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each of the fourth areas, and calculate the current variation time The shortest variation time may be displayed together with In this case, a character such as "more than" may be written on the right side of the shortest fluctuation time. As a result, when the player feels that it takes a long time to get a big win based on the current fluctuation time, the player can determine how much the time to get a big win will be shortened by hitting the ball. Since it can be grasped based on the time, for example, it is possible to let the player decide to leave the seat or finish the business after hitting the ball to achieve a big win as soon as possible.

In addition, instead of the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the existence of the jackpot may be notified by lighting/flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, or by a variable display device separately from the illumination parts 29 to 33. The notification may be made by lighting, blinking, or the like of a lamp provided in the unit 80 or the like. In addition, the presence of a big win may be notified by making a predetermined sound, or by causing a character provided on the game board 13 to perform a predetermined action. In addition, a combination of two or more of the image display on the third pattern display device 81, the lighting and flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and other lamps, the sound production, and the movement of the character is a combination of two or more to win a jackpot. You can announce your presence.

Even when notifying that there is no jackpot in the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held, a predetermined character may appear as the failure notification image, or the third symbol that is variably displayed may be displayed. You can change the color and shape. Also, an effect may be displayed around the third pattern, or the color of the back image or the speed at which the back image flows may be changed. Further, a small deviation notification image may be displayed in a corner of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. By displaying the loss notification image in a small size, it is possible to make it difficult for a person other than the player to visually recognize the loss notification image, and it is easy to prevent others from knowing the existence of the big win. In addition, by changing the color of part or all of the reserved ball number pattern displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db from blue to gray, or by erasing the reserved ball number pattern for a predetermined time, the variable performance and suspension during execution are performed. It may be notified that there is no jackpot in the medium variation performance. In addition, instead of the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the non-existence of the jackpot may be notified by lighting/blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, or may be changed separately from the illumination parts 29 to 33. The notification may be made by lighting, blinking, or the like of a lamp provided on the display unit 80 or the like. Further, the fact that there is no big win may be notified by producing a predetermined sound, or may be notified by causing a character provided on the game board 13 to perform a predetermined action. In addition, a combination of two or more of the image display on the third pattern display device 81, the lighting and flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and other lamps, the sound production, and the action of the role object will result in a big win. You can tell it doesn't exist.

In the above embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed for one second or longer, the existence of the jackpot is notified. The presence of a big win may be notified when the button is pressed a plurality of times (for example, twice). Thus, when the player unintentionally touches the notification button 23, if the number of touches is less than the predetermined number within the predetermined time, the presence of the big win is not notified. Therefore, when the player does not intend, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the variable performance being executed or the variable performance being held includes a big win, and the interest in the game can be maintained. be able to.

Also, when it is detected that the notification button 23 has been pressed, the presence of the jackpot may be notified immediately. As a result, the notification is made even when the player does not intend to do so. If you want to finish the action, you can quickly decide whether the action can be performed immediately.

In addition, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, instead of immediately notifying the existence of the big win, a screen for selecting whether or not such notification may be made is displayed as the second screen. The three-symbol display device 81 may be made to display, and the player may be allowed to operate the frame button 22 or the like to select whether or not to perform the notification. As a result, when the player misunderstands the other function and presses the notification button, the player can be made aware of the misunderstanding. In addition, it is possible to suppress the announcement of the existence of a big win even though the player does not want it.

In the above-described embodiment, the notification button 23 is provided on the right side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front. For example, the notification button 23 may be provided on the lower tray unit 15 or the operation handle 51 may be provided with the notification button 23 . By providing the notification button 23 at a different position from the upper plate 17 where the frame button 22 is provided, it is possible to suppress the operation of the notification button 23 by mistake for the frame button 22.例文帳に追加In addition, by providing the notice button 23 in a place such as the lower tray unit 15 where the player normally does not operate the button, the player can be made aware that the notice button 23 is a special button. In addition, if a notification button 23 is provided on the operating handle 51, while the person who was originally playing the game is leaving the seat, another person casually operates the notification button 23 to enter the variable performance during execution and suspension. Even when trying to confirm whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win, the user has to extend his or her hand near the operation handle 51, which is conspicuous to surrounding players and people involved in the hall. The operation of the notification button 23 can be made to hesitate.

In the above-described embodiment, the notification button 23 is configured as a push button, but the configuration is not limited to this, and may be any configuration as long as it is operated by the player. For example, it may be configured by a sensor that senses contact with a human hand, or may be configured by an operation lever. Alternatively, it may be configured by a slide type switch. A slide-type switch may be a switch that is biased in one direction. In this case, the existence of a big win may be notified when the board is slid in the direction opposite to the urging direction for a predetermined time or more.

Also, the role of the notification button 23 may be given to a button having another function. For example, when the frame button 22 is pressed continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) or longer, and if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the variable effects being executed and held, a big win notification image and a variable time notification are displayed. Images may be displayed. In addition, a notification mode selection screen is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22, and when the notification mode is selected by the player, if there is a variable performance that becomes a big win in the variable performance being executed and held, a big win is obtained. A notification image or a variable time notification image may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed and the notification (notification of the existence of the jackpot) based on the pressing operation is started, the notification is held for 5 seconds regardless of the presence or absence of the subsequent pressing operation of the notification button 23. is performed, but instead of this, when the notification button 23 is pressed and the notification (notification of the existence of the jackpot) based on the pressing operation is started, the notification button 23 is continuously pressed. The notification may be made while the notification is continued, and the notification may be terminated when the operation of pressing the notification button 23 is completed. Thereby, the notification can be ended according to the intention of the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent the notification from being continued more than necessary, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that a person other than the player will know the presence or absence of the big win.

In the above-described embodiment, when there is a variable effect that will result in a big win in the variable effect being executed or held based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, a big hit notification image is displayed, and the ball is moved to the game area. A case has been described in which, when it is determined that the launch of the jackpot has been stopped, the fluctuation time notification image is displayed together with the jackpot notification image. On the other hand, when the notification button 23 is pressed down, it is determined that the hitting of the ball to the game area is stopped even if there is no variable performance that becomes a big hit in the variable performance being executed or held. Sometimes it may be configured to display the variable time of each variable performance (remaining variable time in the variable performance being executed). As a result, the variable time notification image is displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the variable performance that results in a big win, so even if someone other than the player sees the variable time notification image, the presence or absence of the variable performance that results in a big win for the other person. can be suppressed from being known.

In the above-described embodiment, when there is a variable performance that will result in a big win in the variable performance being executed or held based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the variable time notification image is displayed together with the big win notification image. describes the case of displaying the variable time of each variable effect that is executed until the most recent jackpot (the remaining variable time in the variable effect being executed), but the variable time notification image is the most recent jackpot. The variable time of the variable performance being executed and each variable time of all the pending variable performances may be displayed including the variable performance after the execution. In this case, the variable time notification command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes information indicating the variable time of the variable performance being executed and each variable time of all pending variable performances. can be anything. As a result, the player can know not only the time until the most recent big win, but also the time after the big win until all the suspended variable effects are executed. Therefore, the player can determine at what timing to leave the seat or complete the business, including not only the time until the latest big win, but also the time required for the variable performance after the big win.

In addition, in the fluctuation time notification image, the time from that time to the latest big win may be displayed. For example, if a big hit is achieved in a variable performance with a pending number of times of 2, the remaining variable time of the variable performance being executed, the variable time of the variable performance with a pending count of 1, and the variable performance with a pending count of 2 The total time including the fluctuation time may be displayed as the time until the latest big win. As a result, the player can grasp the time until the big win at a glance without summing up the variable time of each variable effect, so that it is possible to quickly judge whether there is time to leave the seat or finish the business. can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the variable effect being executed or held based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the variable time displayed together with the big win notification image. Although the notification image is displayed, in this case, only the jackpot notification image may be displayed and the variable time notification image may not be displayed. In this case, the player cannot know the time until the jackpot hits, but can grasp the presence or absence of the jackpot. can decide whether or not it is permissible to execute

In the above embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, if there is a variation effect that will result in a big win in the variation effects being executed and held, a big hit notification image is displayed, and furthermore, a predetermined condition is met. The case where the variable time notification image is displayed has been described. Instead of this, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, each variation of the pending variable performance regardless of whether or not the variable performance being executed or pending has the variable performance of a big hit. It may display time. In this case, the player cannot know whether or not there is a big win variation performance among the variable performances being executed and suspended, but can know each variation time of the pending variation performance. Some of the variable productions take several minutes, such as special reach. By knowing each variable time of the pending variable performance, the player can decide to leave the seat or finish the business while the variable performance with such a long variable time is being executed. In this case, the remaining variable time of the variable performance being executed may be displayed together with each variable time of the pending variable performance. As a result, when the remaining variable time of the variable performance being executed is long, the player can decide to leave the seat or finish the business during that time.

In addition, when the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), the hitting of the ball to the game area is stopped. Even if not, after that, assuming that there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (no new variable performance is suspended), each variable time of the pending variable performance is calculated and the variable time is announced. Images may be displayed. As a result, even if the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to judge whether or not there is time for the player to leave the seat or complete the business by predicting the time until the player gets a big win to some extent. can be done. In this case, while the ball is not stopped, a character such as "(forecast)" is written to the right of each variable time of the pending variable effect displayed in the variable time notification image, or the pending It is also possible to darken the brightness of the letters of each variable time of the , so that the player can understand that each value is based on assumptions. Then, if it is determined that the ball has stopped hitting, the characters "(expected)" are erased, or the brightness of the characters is displayed brightly, and the pending display displayed in the variable time notification image It may be indicated so that the player can understand that each variable time of the variable effect is an accurate value.

In addition, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a case where the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, when the jackpot lottery is performed). If it is determined that the ball is hit to the game area at this time, it is stored in each of the look-ahead information first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b as the variation time of each pending variation effect. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the shortest variable time among the variable times that can be determined according to the number of held balls may be calculated, and the variable time notification image may be displayed. In this case, while the hitting of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "above" may be written on the right side of each variable time of the pending variable effect displayed in the variable time notification image. As a result, even if the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, the shortest fluctuation time in each pending fluctuation performance can be grasped, so that it is possible to judge whether there is time to leave the seat or finish the business. can be done.

Also, if the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), especially when the number of pending balls at that time is In the case where there is a tendency that the longer the variable time, the shorter the variable time is determined, and when it is determined that the ball has stopped hitting the game area when the notification button 23 is pressed, the variable time is announced. In the image, not only the fluctuation time (current fluctuation time) of each variable effect when the state in which the ball is stopped is maintained, but also the first look-ahead information in the look-ahead information storage area 223b for each variable effect. Calculate the shortest fluctuation time (shortest fluctuation time) among the fluctuation times that can be determined according to the number of held balls based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each of the fourth areas, and calculate the current fluctuation time The shortest variation time may be displayed together with In this case, a character such as "more than" may be written on the right side of the shortest fluctuation time. As a result, the player, based on the current variable time and the shortest variable time, can hit the ball in the variable performance executed up to the variable performance having the shortest variable time enough to leave the seat or finish the business. Since it is possible to grasp how much the variable time is shortened, for example, a variable effect with the shortest variable time is quickly executed so that the user can leave the seat or finish the task by hitting the ball. The player can be made to make a decision to finish quickly.

In the above-described embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a predetermined manner, there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the variable effects being executed and held, and the hitting of the ball into the game area is stopped. A case has been described in which the variable time notification image is displayed on the condition that Instead of this, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, if there is a variable performance being executed or pending, or if there is a variable performance that becomes a big hit in the pending variable performance, it is combined with the big win notification image. Alternatively, instead of the jackpot notification image, the variable time notification image may be displayed regardless of whether the ball is stopped. As a result, the player can grasp that there is a variable performance being executed or pending, or that there is a large winning variable performance in the pending variable performance, and can know the variable time of each variable performance. The player can make a decision to leave the seat or finish the business by knowing the existence of the big win and the variable time of each variable performance.

In addition, when the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), the hitting of the ball to the game area is stopped. Even if not, after that, assuming that there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (no new variable performance is suspended), each variable time of the pending variable performance is calculated and the variable time is announced. Images may be displayed. As a result, even if the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to judge whether or not there is time for the player to leave the seat or complete the business by predicting the time until the player gets a big win to some extent. can be done. In this case, while the ball is not stopped, a character such as "(forecast)" is written to the right of each variable time of the pending variable effect displayed in the variable time notification image, or the pending It is also possible to darken the brightness of the letters of each variable time of the , so that the player can understand that each value is based on assumptions. Then, if it is determined that the ball has stopped hitting, the characters "(expected)" are erased, or the brightness of the characters is displayed brightly, and the pending display displayed in the variable time notification image It may be indicated so that the player can understand that each variable time of the variable effect is an accurate value.

In addition, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a case where the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, when the jackpot lottery is performed). If it is determined that the ball is hit to the game area at this time, it is stored in each of the look-ahead information first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b as the variation time of each pending variation effect. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the shortest variable time among the variable times that can be determined according to the number of held balls may be calculated, and the variable time notification image may be displayed. In this case, while the hitting of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "above" may be written on the right side of each variable time of the pending variable effect displayed in the variable time notification image. As a result, even if the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, the shortest fluctuation time in each pending fluctuation performance can be grasped, so that it is possible to judge whether there is time to leave the seat or finish the business. can be done.

Also, if the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), especially when the number of pending balls at that time is In the case where there is a tendency that the longer the variable time, the shorter the variable time is determined, and when it is determined that the ball has stopped hitting the game area when the notification button 23 is pressed, the variable time is announced. In the image, not only the fluctuation time (current fluctuation time) of each variable effect when the state in which the ball is stopped is maintained, but also the first look-ahead information in the look-ahead information storage area 223b for each variable effect. Calculate the shortest fluctuation time (shortest fluctuation time) among the fluctuation times that can be determined according to the number of held balls based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each of the fourth areas, and calculate the current fluctuation time The shortest variation time may be displayed together with In this case, a character such as "more than" may be written on the right side of the shortest fluctuation time. As a result, the player, based on the current variable time and the shortest variable time, can hit the ball in the variable performance executed up to the variable performance having the shortest variable time enough to leave the seat or finish the business. Since it is possible to grasp how much the variable time is shortened, for example, a variable effect with the shortest variable time is quickly executed so that the user can leave the seat or finish the task by hitting the ball. The player can be made to make a decision to finish quickly.

In the above-described embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, if there is a variation effect that will result in a big win in the variation effect being executed or pending, a big hit notification image is displayed, and furthermore, a predetermined condition is met. The case where the variable time notification image is displayed has been described. Instead of this, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, if there is a variation performance that becomes a big win in the variation performance being executed or suspended, the time until the big win is displayed. good too. By performing a predetermined pressing operation on the notification button 23, the player can grasp the time until the big win, so that the player can decide to stop the game and leave the seat or finish the business before the big win. can be easily made available to the player. Incidentally, in this case, if there is no variable effect that will result in a big hit in the pending variable effect, the notification may not be executed. As a result, when the player presses the notification button 23 in a predetermined manner, if the notification is not made, it can be grasped that at least the pending variable performance will not result in a big win, so that the player can immediately leave the seat or make a request. You can make a judgment that you want to finish or try to In addition, if there is no variable effect that becomes a big hit among the variable effects being executed and pending, the notification may be made non-executable. As a result, when the player presses the notification button 23 in a predetermined manner, if the notification is not made, it can be grasped that not only the pending variable performance but also the variable performance being executed will not result in a big win. , it is possible to make a decision to immediately leave the seat or finish the business without waiting for the end of the variable performance being executed.

In addition, if the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), the launch of the ball to the game area is stopped. Even if not, it is possible to calculate and display the time until the jackpot, assuming that there will be no prize winning to the first ball entrance 64 (no suspension of new variable effects). As a result, even if the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to judge whether or not there is time for the player to leave the seat or complete the business by predicting the time until the player gets a big win to some extent. can be done. In this case, while the ball is not stopped, the character "(expected)" is written to the right of the time until the jackpot displayed in the variable time notification image, or the time until the jackpot is reached. The hour letters may be dimmed to indicate to the player that each is a hypothetical value. Then, when it is determined that the ball has stopped hitting, the character "(expected)" is erased or the brightness of the character is displayed brightly, and the time until the big hit is an accurate value. It may be indicated in a way that the player knows that there is something.

In addition, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a case where the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, when the jackpot lottery is performed). If it is determined that the ball is hit to the game area at this time, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b are used for each of the suspended variable effects. After calculating the shortest variable time among the variable times that can be determined according to the number of held balls, the shortest time until a big win may be calculated and displayed. In this case, while the hitting of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "over" may be written to the right of the time until the big win. As a result, even if the hitting of the ball to the game area is not stopped, at least the time required for the player to win the jackpot can be grasped, so that it is judged whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the business. be able to.

Also, if the variable time is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), especially when the number of pending balls at that time is In the case where there is a tendency that the longer the fluctuation time is, the shorter the fluctuation time is determined, when it is determined that the ball hitting into the game area is stopped when the notification button 23 is pressed, the ball hitting is performed. Not only the time until the jackpot is reached when the state in which the game is stopped is maintained (the current time until the jackpot is reached), but also each of the suspended variable effects is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation times that can be determined according to the number of held balls is calculated. You may display the shortest time of In this case, for the shortest time until the jackpot, a character such as "more than" may be written to the right of the shortest time. As a result, when the player feels that the time until the big win is long based on the current time until the big win, if the player hits the ball, the time to get the big win can be shortened. It can be determined based on the shortest time to hit the jackpot. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make the player decide to leave the seat or finish the business after hitting the ball to achieve a big win as soon as possible.

In the above-described embodiment, when the player leaves the seat or completes the task based on the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, what kind of effect is performed while the player leaves the seat or completes the task? The player cannot know if it has been done. However, there are some players who pay attention to what kind of effects are performed by the pachinko machine 10 . For example, when a player starts playing a game, a password issued by a manufacturer or the like is entered into the gaming machine, and when the game ends, the gaming machine displays a two-dimensional code containing information such as the game history. There is a gaming machine having a function of allowing a player's portable terminal or the like to read the data and registering the game history in a server of a maker or the like. In such a gaming machine, the game history includes the history of effects executed by the gaming machine, and based on the history of the effects, special contents can be downloaded to the player's mobile terminal, and the next game can be played. There is a game machine that gives a privilege to a player by causing the game machine to execute a special effect, and the player pays attention to what kind of effect is performed in the game machine. Therefore, after the notification button 23 is pressed for a predetermined period, the third symbol display device 81 may display the history of effects performed in the pachinko machine 10 during a predetermined period. As a result, the player can know the performance performed by the pachinko machine 10 while leaving the seat or completing the business. Therefore, the player can leave the room or finish his/her business with peace of mind. The performance history may display what kind of performance was performed for each variable performance executed after the notification button 23 was pressed. As a result, the player can know in detail the effect that has been performed. Further, when a predetermined effect is executed, it may be displayed that the effect has been executed. As a result, the presence or absence of execution of the effect that the player is paying attention to can be easily known. Regarding the start of the display of the performance history, after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the operation button 22 or the notification button 23 is pressed at the timing when the player wants to leave the seat or start the business. Display of the history of production may be started. As a result, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the history of effects executed after at least the player takes his/her eyes off the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Further, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a predetermined manner, the display of the performance history may be started unconditionally. As a result, even if the player does not leave the seat as a result, the display of the performance history is started, but the display of the performance history can be started with a simple control. On the other hand, as for ending the display of the performance history, the player may press the operation button 22 or the notification button 23 to end the display of the performance history. As a result, it is possible to continue to display the performance history based on the intention of the player and to erase the display. Further, when a predetermined time has passed since the notification button 23 was pressed for a predetermined time, the display of the performance history may be terminated. As a result, the display of the performance history can be ended with a simple control.

In the above embodiment, one of the conditions for displaying the variable time notification image is when it is determined whether or not the hitting of the ball into the game area has been stopped. It is determined whether or not there is no ball entering the general winning hole 63, the first ball entering hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, and the out hole 66, which are the holes that pass through, for 5 seconds or more. The case of determining whether or not the hitting of the ball into the game area has been stopped has been described if the ball has not entered the game area for more than 5 seconds, but the method of determining whether or not the hitting of the ball into the playing area has stopped. is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the firing handle 51 is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the player releases the firing handle 51, the output of the touch sensor 51a changes from on to off. After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that the ball has stopped being shot into the game area, and the player operates the shooting handle 51, thereby turning the output of the touch sensor 51a from off to on. It may be determined that the ball has been hit into the game area by the fact that it has changed to . In addition, a sensor for detecting a ball guided to the upper part of the game area from the ball guide passage (see FIG. 2) formed by the two rails 61 and 62 is provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the sensor detects the ball for a predetermined time. If the ball is not detected, it may be determined that the ball has stopped hitting the game area, and if the ball is detected by the sensor, it may be determined that the ball has been hit to the game area. The sensor may be, for example, one that detects the opening and closing of a return ball prevention member 68 attached to the tip of the inner rail 61. When the return ball prevention member 68 is opened from the ball guide passage, the ball moves to the upper part of the game area. It may be configured to detect the ball guided to the upper part of the game area by detecting the open state of the return ball prevention member 68 when the is guided.

In the above embodiment, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, the operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, including the pending amount In the description above, the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 is canceled when the execution of all the variable effects is completed and the pending variable effects become 0. Instead of this, the timing of canceling the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 is the pending variable effect (that is, , when execution of the variable performance suspended when executing the look-ahead processing is completed, even if there is a suspended variable performance (even if there is a variable performance suspended after the look-ahead processing), the notification button 23 is pressed. operation can be disabled. As a result, at least, in the pending variable performance for which the presence or absence of the variable performance that will result in a big win when the announcement is made based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is determined by the pre-reading process, the notification button 23 is maintained until the execution is completed. Since the pressing operation of is invalidated, it is possible to make it impossible for anyone other than the player to grasp whether or not there is a variable effect that will result in a big win in the pending variable effect. On the other hand, when the presence or absence of the variable performance that will result in a big win is determined by the pre-reading process when performing the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the player presses the notification button 23 again when the execution of the pending variable performance is completed. By performing a pressing operation, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big hit in the variable performance that has been suspended after the look-ahead process, so that the player can make a big hit in the variable performance that is being executed or is on hold. You can have many opportunities to grasp whether there is a variable production that will be.

Further, the timing of canceling the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 may be the time when the winning of the first ball entrance 64 is detected. As a result, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated from the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 to the next detection of the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, if the player stops hitting the ball and then presses the notification button 23 in a predetermined manner and receives a notification based on the pressing operation, the player restarts the game (the ball is hit). is restarted), it is possible to make it impossible for a person other than the player to grasp whether or not there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the pending variable effect. On the other hand, when the player restarts the game and it is detected that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the player presses the notification button 23 again to enter the first ball entrance 64. It is possible to newly determine whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win in the suspended variable performance, including the winning of . In addition, after the notification is made based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, it is possible to cancel the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 simply by monitoring the presence or absence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, so the control is also easy. can be done.

Further, in addition to the above-described embodiment and the above-described modification, at the timing when the jackpot pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or at the timing when the jackpot effect is completed, the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 is canceled. good too. When the player confirms the existence of the variable performance that will result in a big win by the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the player may continue the game until the big win is achieved without leaving the seat or performing any task. Then, at the stage when the jackpot effect is finished, there is a case where the pending variable effect is left. By releasing the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 at the timing when the big winning pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or at the timing when the big winning performance is finished, the player presses the notification button 23. can confirm whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win in the pending variable performance at the stage when the big win is finished. Therefore, after the big win, the player can again decide whether or not it is permissible for the player to immediately leave the seat or complete the task at that stage.

In the above-described embodiment, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, if the operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, even if the predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23 until the invalidation is canceled. The case where the notification is not executed has been described, but if the notification button 23 is pressed in a predetermined manner during the period in which the operation of the notification button 23 is disabled, an image different from the jackpot notification image or the like is displayed. may For example, regardless of whether or not there is a variable effect that will result in a big win in the variable effects being executed and pending, the color of the boy's hair HB is displayed in red, or the boy's headband is displayed while the boy's hair HB is black. An image different from the jackpot announcement image (an image in which the boy's hair HB is gold) may be displayed by displaying the color in gold. As a result, after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, during the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, a strange image different from the jackpot notification image or the like is displayed. Therefore, when the player leaves the gaming machine according to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, even if a person other than the player presses the notification button 23, only a strange image is displayed. It can confuse and annoy others. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another player from obtaining the profit of the jackpot obtained by the variable performance withheld by the game of the original player, and to protect the profit of the original player. .

In the above-described embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed, it is notified whether or not there is a variable effect that will result in a big hit among the variable effects being executed and held. On the other hand, currently, when a player starts playing a game, the password issued by the manufacturer or the like is entered into the gaming machine, and when the game ends, information such as the gaming history is included on the gaming machine side2. There is a gaming machine that has a function of displaying a dimension code, allowing a player's mobile terminal or the like to read it, and registering the game history in a server of a manufacturer or the like. In such a gaming machine, the notification button 23 is pressed only during the period from when the password is entered at the start of the game to when the two-dimensional code including the information such as the game history is displayed at the end of the game. The operation may be regarded as effective, and it may be notified whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win among the variable performances being executed and pending. In this case, the display of the two-dimensional code containing the information such as the game history associated with the end of the jackpot may be possible even while the variable effect is being performed. As a result, the person who entered the password and started the game presses the notification button 23, and after the notification based on the pressing operation is executed, the two-dimensional code accompanying the end of the game is displayed on the gaming machine. After that, even if the player leaves the seat during execution of the variable performance, another person presses the notification button 23 to determine whether there is a variable performance that becomes a big hit in the variable performance being executed or suspended. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp whether

In addition, the game machine is configured so that when starting a game, the player is prompted to enter a password devised by the player, and when ending the game, the password entered at the start of the game is input. Only during the period until the password is entered at the end of the game, the depressing operation of the notification button 23 is regarded as effective, and among the variable performances being executed and pending, there is a variable performance that results in a big win. You may make it notify whether it is. In this case, the input of the password following the end of the jackpot may be allowed even while the variable effect is being performed. As a result, a person who has entered a password and started a game presses the notification button 23, and after the notification based on the pressing operation is executed, if the password accompanying the end of the game is entered, then a variable effect is performed. Even if the player leaves the seat during the execution of , other players cannot press the notification button 23 and grasp whether or not there is a variable performance that will result in a big win in the variable performance being executed or held. can do.

In the above embodiment, if the notification button 23 is pressed during the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is disabled, any of the third symbol display device 81, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc. In either case, some kind of notification may be made. As a result, when another person presses the notification button 23 while the person originally playing the game has left the seat due to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the person originally playing the game is seated. , it can be known that the notification button 23 has been pressed by another person. Therefore, it is possible to prevent other persons from pressing the notification button 23 . Further, when the notification button 23 is pressed more than a predetermined number of times while the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is disabled, an alarm sound may be generated. As a result, the fact that the notification button 23 has been pressed more than a predetermined number of times during the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated can be notified to the person who was originally playing the game, the person involved in the hall, etc. Therefore, it is possible to prevent other persons from pressing the notification button 23 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed, the hall computer provided outside the pachinko machine 10 may be notified of this fact. As a result, since the state of pressing operation of the notification button 23 can be grasped by the hall computer, it is possible for the persons involved in the hall to grasp when there is a strange pressing operation of the notification button 23.例文帳に追加

In the above embodiment, the case where the jackpot notification image is displayed when there is a jackpot variation effect among the variable effects being executed and pending has been described, but when displaying the jackpot notification image, the jackpot type is It may be displayed so that it can be understood. For example, in the 2R probability variable jackpot, opening and closing operations of the specific winning port 65a are often performed in a very short time, the jackpot period ends quickly, and it is extremely rare for the ball to win the specific winning port 65a. , Some players think that they will leave the seat or finish their business if it will be a 2R probability variable jackpot. Also, if the jackpot notification image is displayed, you can not grasp the jackpot type, wait until you hit the jackpot without leaving or doing any business, and if you end up with a 2R variable jackpot, you should have left or completed the business. Some players feel that On the other hand, when the jackpot notification image is displayed, if the jackpot type is displayed so that the jackpot type can be recognized, the player can grasp the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. You can decide whether to leave or finish your business.

In the above embodiment, the case of displaying the jackpot notification image, the variable time notification image, etc. when there is a variable effect that will be a big win among the variable effects being executed and pending has been described. The case of displaying an image or the like may be limited to a case where there is a jackpot of a predetermined jackpot type among the variable performances being executed and pending, or among the variable performances being held. For example, if there is a variable performance of 15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot in the variable performance being executed and pending, or in the variable performance on hold, a jackpot notification image or a variable time notification image and the like, and even if there is a variable performance that results in a 2R probability variable jackpot, the jackpot notification image, the variable time notification image, and the like may be hidden. As a result, the player presses the notification button 23 and the notification image is displayed when the player wants to stop the game and leave the seat, or when the player wants to complete a task such as a call or an e-mail using a mobile phone. Depending on whether or not there is a variable performance that is at least a predetermined jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot in the above example) among the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held. You can check whether Therefore, the player can decide to immediately stop the game in order to leave the seat or complete the task if there is no variable performance for the predetermined big win type. In addition, if there is a variable performance that results in a big win of a predetermined big win type, the player can decide to continue the game until the big win is achieved. In other words, with this notice button 23, when the player wants to leave the room or finish his/her business, it can be determined whether or not the action can be executed immediately. In particular, in the 2R probability variable jackpot, as described above, the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a is often performed in a very short time, and the jackpot period ends quickly, and it is extremely unlikely that the ball will win the specific winning port 65a. Since it is rare, many players want to leave the seat or finish their business when the 2R probability variable jackpot is won. Even if there is a 2R probability variable jackpot in the variable performance being executed and pending, or in the pending variable performance, if the jackpot notification image, the variable time notification image, etc. are not displayed, the 2R probability variable jackpot Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from leaving the seat or making the player wait without doing any business.

Also, even if there is a 2R probability variable jackpot in the variable performance being executed and pending, or in the variable performance being held, if the jackpot notification image, the variable time notification image, etc. are not displayed, the game While the player is away, there is a possibility that the 2R probability variable jackpot will be displayed, and a screen (background image, etc.) corresponding to the high probability state (probability variable state) will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, there are cases where the player is in a probability-variable state unexpectedly while he or she is away from the seat. It will make you doubt that you may have gone. On the other hand, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, there is no 15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot in the variable performance being executed and held, or in the variable performance being held. Also, if there is a 2R probability variable jackpot, a probability variable transition notification image for notifying that the game will shift to a high probability state may be displayed for a predetermined period of time. As the variable probability transition notification image, the effect image itself displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when developing to the high probability state may be used. As a result, the player can understand that there is a 2R probability variable jackpot in the variable performance being executed and suspended, or in the variable performance being suspended, and that the transition to the high probability state is made. Even if a screen corresponding to a high-probability state is displayed when returning after leaving the seat, it can be grasped that it is caused by a variable performance being executed or held before leaving the seat. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having doubts as described above.

Also, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, if there is a 2R probability variable jackpot in the variable performance being executed and held, or in the variable performance being held, Even if the 2R probability variable jackpot is established, a screen corresponding to the high probability state is not displayed, and a predetermined time sufficient for the player to return after leaving the seat after the 2R probability variable jackpot is reached has passed. After that, a screen corresponding to the high probability state may be displayed. If a screen corresponding to the high probability state is displayed after the player who left the seat based on the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 returns to the seat, execution is performed at the time when the notification button 23 is pressed. A player can be made aware that there is a 2R probability variable jackpot in the variable performance during and on hold, or in the variable performance on hold, and other players can play the game while the player is away. You can suppress the suspicion that you may have done it without permission. In addition, even if the 2R probability variable jackpot becomes a high probability state while the player is away, the screen corresponding to the high probability state is not displayed until the player returns, so the high probability state is displayed to others. You can make sure that you do not know that you are.

Also, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, if there is a 2R probability variable jackpot in the variable performance being executed and held, or in the variable performance being held, Even if the 2R probability variable jackpot is established, the screen corresponding to the high probability state is not displayed, and after that, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a predetermined manner or the frame button 22 is pressed in a predetermined manner, the probability is high. A screen corresponding to the state may be displayed. As a result, while the player is away from the seat based on the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, when the notification is executed, the variable performance that is being executed or is on hold. If the 2R probability variable jackpot in the above is established, the player who has returned to the seat performs a predetermined pressing operation on the notification button 23 again, or the player presses the frame button 22 as expected. By performing, an image corresponding to the high-probability state can be displayed. That is, if the player returns to his/her seat and presses the notification button 23 again in a predetermined manner, or if the player does not press the frame button 22 as expected, an image corresponding to the high-probability state is displayed. If an image corresponding to the effect shoe state is displayed when the player returns to his seat, which is not displayed, it means that another person has pressed down the notification button 23 or the frame button 22.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to know that another person has operated the pachinko machine 10 while the player is away, and in other words, it is possible to prevent the other person from operating the pachinko machine 10 without permission.

In the above-described embodiment, after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is performed, the variable effect is executed as usual. If it is determined that there is no variable effect that will result in a big hit in the medium variable effect (that is, all pending variable effects will be lost), and the jackpot notification image, etc. is not displayed, at least for that notification As for the variable performance targeted for the look-ahead, the performance that improves the expectation of a big win may not be performed. When the big hit notification image or the like is not displayed in spite of the predetermined pressing operation of the notification button 23, it means that there is no variable performance that will result in a big win in the variable performance being executed or pending at the time of the pressing operation. Players can find out. Therefore, even though the player knows that he or she will not win a big win, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming overwhelmed by performing an effect that enhances the expectation that the player will win a big win. In addition, by not performing an effect that improves the expectation of a big win, it is possible to prevent the characters from making meaningless movements, so that it is possible to prevent the life of the gaming machine from being shortened. As a result of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, when the big hit notification image or the like is not displayed, only in the situation where the shooting of the ball to the game area is stopped, at least for the purpose of the notification For the variable performance that is the target of (1), the performance that improves the expectation of a big win may not be performed. As a result, when the ball is hit into the game area, even if the big win notification image or the like is not displayed by the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the effect of improving the expectation of the big win is provided. Therefore, the player can be given a feeling of anticipation of a big win by the variation performance performed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23. , can increase the interest in the game. When the variable performance is executed so as not to perform the performance for improving the expectation of a big win, the fixed display of the pattern may be performed after the high-speed variation is executed in a simply determined variation time. Thus, with simple control, it is possible to execute the variable performance so as not to perform the performance for improving the expectation of a big win. In addition, when the variable effect is executed so as not to perform the effect to improve the sense of anticipation of winning, animation, drama, music video, etc. may be reproduced within a predetermined variable time. By watching these animations, etc., the player can alleviate his dissatisfaction with the fact that the long time-varying effect is performed even though he knows that he will be out.

In the above-described embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a predetermined manner, a so-called one-shot notification effect (an effect to notify that the expectation of a big hit is 100%) is performed at that time. If there is, even if there is a variable performance that will result in a big win among the variable performances being executed and pending, the jackpot notification image and the like may be hidden. Since the one-shot notification effect allows the player to grasp that the game will be a big win, it is not necessary to dare to display the big-win notification image, etc., and by hiding the big-win notification image, etc., the one-shot notification effect can be achieved. Players can concentrate on

In the above embodiment, the case where the look-ahead process is performed by the audio ramp control device 113 has been described. The value of the random number counter C1 per hit is prefetched to determine whether or not it will be a big hit, and the determination result is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Based on the determination result of the look-ahead process received from the control device 110, it may be determined whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the variable effect being executed or on hold. In addition, when the main controller 110 performs a variable performance jackpot lottery to be executed from now on, the value of the pending first winning random number counter C1 or the like is read in advance, and the variable performance to be executed from now on and the pending variation are read in advance. It is determined whether or not there is a variable performance that results in a big hit in the performance, and the determination result is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and in the voice lamp control device 113, when there is an operation to press the notification button 23, Based on the determination result transmitted from the main controller 110, control may be performed to notify whether or not there is a variable effect that will result in a big win in the variable effect being executed or held.

Also, the read-ahead process may be executed by the display control device 114 . For example, information for performing the look-ahead process, that is, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type obtained from the counter buffer with the start winning in the main control device 110 A prefetch information storage area similar to that shown in FIG. 8 is provided in the display control device 114 to store each value of the counter CS1. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the display control device 114 executes a pre-reading process, and it is determined that there is a variable performance that will result in a big hit among the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held. In this case, a jackpot notification image may be displayed. In this case, when receiving the pending pitches command from the main controller 110, the audio lamp control device 113 may transmit the pending pitches command as it is to the display control device 114 as a pending pitches command for display. As a result, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the main control device 110 along with the start winning are stored in the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information provided in the look-ahead information storage area of the display control device 114. Among them, it can be stored in an area corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the display reserved ball number command. Then, the display control device 114 may perform shift processing similar to the processing of S1103 in FIG. 24 on the look-ahead information storage area each time it receives a display variation pattern command. As a result, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c of the main controller 110 are stored in the look-ahead information No. 0 area provided in the look-ahead information storage area of the display control device 114. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth reserved ball storage areas 203b of the main controller 110 are stored in the first to fourth areas of the lookahead information, respectively. can be stored.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. A command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, the RAM of the one control device is provided with a prefetch information storage area similar to that shown in FIG. When a pending ball number command is received from the Each of the included counter values C1-C3, CS1 may be stored. Also, one control device may execute shift processing similar to the processing of S1103 in FIG. Then, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, one control device may execute the prefetching process based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetching information storage area. .

In the above embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed down, it is explained whether or not there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the variable effect being executed and held, but regarding the variable effect being executed , it may be notified whether or not there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the pending variable effect. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the action of leaving the seat or completing the task can be executed immediately after the variable effect being executed is finished. In addition, when the notification button 23 is pressed, the pre-reading process is executed only for the variable effect that the number of times of suspension is within a predetermined number of times (for example, two times), and the variable effect and the number of times of suspension during execution are the predetermined number of times. Notification of whether or not there is a variable performance that will be a big hit in the variable performance within (for example, 2 times) or in the variable performance where the number of times of suspension is within a predetermined number (for example, 2 times) excluding the variable performance being executed. You may As a result, when the player can leave the seat in a short period of time or can complete the task immediately, if there is no fluctuation effect that the number of times of holding is at least within a predetermined number of times, the player can leave the seat or complete the requirements. A player may be allowed to make a decision as to what he or she wants to do. In addition, when the notification button 23 is pressed, it is judged whether or not there is a possibility of winning a big win within a predetermined time (for example, two minutes) by a prefetch process, and the judgment result is notified so that it can be understood. good too. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not there is a possibility of winning a big prize within two minutes, and based on this, can decide whether to leave the seat or finish the business.

In the above embodiment, when the jackpot notification command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display lamp control device 114, the display control device 114 displays the jackpot notification image based on the content indicated by the jackpot notification command. A case has been described in which the image data for big-hit notification and the reserved image data for big-hit are developed by the setting process (S1906, see FIG. 37(b)). On the other hand, an additional data table for displaying a jackpot notification image corresponding to the jackpot notification command is prepared in the additional data table storage area 232b. By reading the additional data table corresponding to the command from the additional data table 232b and setting it in the additional data table buffer 233b, it is added to the image displayed according to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, and the jackpot announcement is made. It may be configured to display an image.

In the above embodiment, when the variable time notification command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display lamp control device 114, the display control device 114, based on the content indicated by the variable time notification command, changes The case where the variable time notification image data is developed by the time notification image setting process (S1908, see FIG. 38B) has been described. On the other hand, an additional data table for displaying the variable time notification image is prepared in the additional data table storage area 232b. By reading the additional data table from the additional data table 232b and setting it in the additional data table buffer 233b, the variable time notification image is added to the image displayed according to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. may be configured to display

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the audio ramp control device 113, when the stop type command is received, the fluctuation start flag is always set to ON. The fluctuation start flag may be set to ON when the stop type command is received after there is As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation effect when a stop type command is received without receiving a variation pattern command.

Also, at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command, the variation start flag may be set to ON. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, based on the fact that the variation start flag is turned on, display is performed to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command. A variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, without waiting for reception of the stop type command by the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is caused to execute the variation effect on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command. can be done. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command, You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. FIG. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the variable effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the stop type command for display.

In the above-described embodiment, the player determines whether or not there is a variable effect that will result in a big win during the variable effect of the third symbol that is held and executed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). The case where the player is notified by the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 has been described. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (start winning), the second symbol (normal symbol) is suspended and executed during the variable display (stops at "○" symbol). In addition to whether or not there is a variation effect that becomes a big hit during the variation effect of the third symbol by the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 by the player, or instead , may be announced to the player. As a result, whether there is a winning variable display in the variable display of the pending second pattern (normal pattern) or in the variable display of the second pattern (normal pattern) being executed and held The player can grasp whether or not. Therefore, when the player wants to leave the room or finish his/her business, it can be determined whether or not the action can be immediately performed by the notification button 23 . Among game machines, there is a game machine which enhances game performance by the presence or absence of winning of normal symbols, and it is particularly effective in such a game machine. In this case, based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, together with the notification of the presence or absence of the hit, or instead of the notification of the presence or absence of the hit, each variation time of the second pattern (normal pattern) is displayed or hit You may display the time until it becomes. Further, the above-described modification shown for the notification regarding the variation effect of the third symbol based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 can be applied to the notification regarding the variation effect of the second symbol (normal symbol).

In the above-described embodiment, the description has been given of the case where, as the additional data table, the drawing contents for adding and displaying the continuous advance notice effect, which is not normally displayed in the variable effect, to the third symbol display device 81 are defined, but this is not necessarily the case. The additional data table is not limited, and various effects to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in addition to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. The drawing content for drawing may be specified. Further, in the additional data table, drawing contents necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 110 are displayed. or in addition to stipulating such drawing content, the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all of the one presentation, or the drawing content displayed in one presentation The drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image to be displayed may be predetermined.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of part or all of one effect are defined by the additional data table, the third pattern display device 81 displays an image for one frame in the additional data table. The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time and color information specifying the changed color tone of the sprite are associated with an address expressed in units of time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds). It may be specified. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional drawing contents defined in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233b, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a is added. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table. Such an additional data table may be provided for displaying the jackpot announcement image, for example, to change the color of the boy's hair HB from that specified by the display data table.

Further, when the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image to be displayed in one effect are defined by the additional data table, the additional data table allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image for one frame. is displayed as one unit (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 stores the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is defined, various sprites defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed. Such an additional data table is prepared for the display of the jackpot notification image, and for example, the boy displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third pattern display device 81 as the jackpot notification image is replaced with another character. good too.

In the above-described embodiment, in the display control device 314, in addition to the display data table that defines the drawing contents of the base effects (for example, variable effects), the effects to be additionally displayed (for example, continuous advance notice effects) are drawn. Although the description has been given of the case where an additional data table that defines the content is set and the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233c is acquired from each data table, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a base effect (for example, , variable effect), when the display of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) is determined, it is additionally displayed with respect to the display data table corresponding to the base effect. A new display data table is generated by adding the drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the effect to be displayed for each address indicating the display time, and the drawing contents of the image are acquired based on the new display data table. You may do so. As a result, it is possible to easily display the effect that is displayed in addition to the base effect. In addition, for each type of base effect, there is a display data table that defines the drawing contents of only the base effect, and display data that defines the image content of superimposed effects to be displayed in addition to the base effect. Since it is not necessary to have a table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of data tables. In addition, since the drawing contents can be specified using only the newly created display data table, the process required for specifying the drawing contents can be compared with the case where the drawing contents are specified from both the display data table and the additional data table. load can be lightened.

In addition, when it is decided to hide the effect to be displayed in addition to the base effect, the display data table corresponding to the base effect is used as it is, and the drawing content of the image is acquired. may

In addition, in the display data table, along with the drawing contents of the base production (for example, variable production), the drawing contents of the additionally displayed production (for example, continuous advance notice production) are additionally displayed. If you describe it in a format that clearly states that it is the drawing content of the effect that is displayed in addition to it, it will be displayed in addition to the drawing content of the base effect. The drawing contents of the effect are specified from the display data table, and when the additionally displayed effect is hidden, the drawing content of the additionally displayed effect is discarded and the base effect is generated. may be specified from the display data table. This eliminates the need for an additional data table that prescribes the drawing contents of the effects to be additionally displayed, thus eliminating the need for controlling the additional data table and reducing the processing load.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command in the display control device 114 has been described. Prepare a display data table for each element such as "variation startup", "high speed variation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command After specifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variable performance are combined into one to generate the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern. You may do so. "Variable start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the data table can be provided efficiently by dividing the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

In the above embodiment, a common pointer 233c is used in the display data table and the additional data table, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233c. A pointer may be provided.

In the above embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of the image for one frame at which drawing processing ends is described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above-described embodiment, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer to which the rendered image should be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information rendered earlier from the other frame buffer. is read out and sent to the third pattern display device 81, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. are alternately selected, and the previously developed image information is read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 . Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third pattern display device 81, it outputs the image information to the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded and the third pattern display device 81. You may make it replace with the frame buffer which carries out.

In the above-described embodiment, after the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233a, by the time the fixed display effect ends, the main controller 110 through the sound lamp control device 113 When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233a Although it has been described, it is also possible to set the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect to the display data table buffer 233a again. Also, in this case, until either the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113, the fixed display effect is not performed. The fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set again in the display data table buffer 233a every time it ends. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the fixed display effect until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110 .

In the above-described embodiment, the demo effect is described as stopping display of the third symbol consisting of the main symbols with no numbers "0" to "9", but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , a third pattern consisting of a numbered main pattern or a numbered main pattern may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the display data table and the additional data table define the content of the image (drawing content) to be drawn in correspondence with the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds. , but is not necessarily limited to this, as long as the display content is specified for each predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third pattern display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third pattern display device 81 is 1/30 Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table and the additional data table may define display contents every 1/30 second.

In addition, in the display data table and the additional data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not indicated, but the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. It may define the address of the character ROM 234 . In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores the image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, each sprite type can be associated with the sprite. Since there is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 that performs the variable performance has explained the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 and the third symbol display device 81 is provided with a separate fourth symbol display device, and by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation performance executed by the third symbol display device 81, the continuous notice effect is executed. good. In this case, the control of the fourth pattern display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, a continuous advance notice performance may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 10 with a role that operates according to various performances and activating the performance in a predetermined mode together with the variable performance. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect is performed in the third pattern display device 81 (and the first pattern display device 37), the pattern is continuously displayed in the fourth pattern display device, or the character is operated in a predetermined manner. Or, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player can be given a feeling of anticipation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the pattern is displayed by the fourth pattern display device different from the third pattern display device 81. , the operation of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is performed, and the effect different from the usual effect is performed to the player. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 is made to perform the winning judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 is made to perform the continuous notice effect, and the display control device 114 is made to perform the change effect, so that the pachinko machine 10 continues When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect on the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect on the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 , or a combination of them), by changing the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) Prepare multiple continuous notice effect modes selected according to good too.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the case where the image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the continuous advance notice performance may be performed by displaying a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol to be displayed when the variable performance ends. In this case, when the reception of the continuous notice command is determined in other command processing (S12722 in FIG. 31) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop pattern determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on. Along with this, other stop symbol determination flags may be set to OFF. In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command process. It is set as a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eye when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays chance numbers as stop symbols for each variable performance, the player can be made to expect a big win in the end.

In the above embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of pending balls incremented by "1" when there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64. The case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning is included in the number command and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, but it is included in the reserved ball number command. The types of counters may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the audio lamp controller 113 of the values of the counters acquired in conjunction with the start winning, the information indicating the values of the counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may be added with the value of each counter acquired with the start winning. As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the command indicates that the value of each counter to be notified is a variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the pending ball number command are stored in the look-ahead information storage area 233b. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when a pending ball number command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command , whether it is a jackpot or not, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the type of loss in the case of a loss, etc. are partially or entirely determined, and these determination results are used instead of the values of each counter indicated by the command, or , may be stored in the prefetch information storage area 233b together with part or all of the value of the counter. As a result, when the prefetching process is executed based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, etc., the judgment result such as whether or not the variable effect being executed or held is a big hit is already stored in the prefetching information storage area 233b. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, it is only necessary to read this judgment result, and the execution of the process can be completed quickly. In addition, if the variable time of the variable effect is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), the number of pending balls command (or When a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, it is not possible to determine the number of pending balls when the variable effect is started, so it is impossible to accurately determine the variable time. Therefore, in this case, it is preferable to store at least the value of the variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation time in the look-ahead information storage area 233b. As a result, when the look-ahead process is executed, if the hitting of the ball to the game area is stopped, the number of pending balls at the time when the variable effect is started can be determined. It is possible to calculate the variation time based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 together with the determination result of whether or not the game is a big win, the type of the big win in the case of a big win, and the type of loss in the case of a loss.

In the above embodiment, the case where the game board 13 is provided with one first ball entrance 64 for starting the jackpot lottery when a ball is entered has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound ramp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired with the winning (starting winning) of each first ball entrance is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. You may In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main controller 110 with the start winning is may include information indicating whether the In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning to any of the first entrances. may Furthermore, in the sound ramp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area may be prepared for each first ball entrance. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, shift processing is performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the first entrance where the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command is detected. It can be carried out. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending variable effect for each first ball entrance can be held in the sound ramp control device 113 as well. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the losing type, etc. differ depending on the first ball entrance that has started winning, in the look-ahead process, it is determined whether each variable effect will be a jackpot. It is possible to correctly determine whether or not, the type of jackpot in the case of a big win, the type of loss in the case of a loss, etc., based on which first ball entrance the starting prize is entered. In addition, when the variable effect based on the start winning to one first entrance is given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the other first entrance, the first entrance to one Pre-reading processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the variable performance based on the start winning to the ball, and the number of suspension times of the variable performance to be the most recent big win can be correctly determined, so that the most recent big win can be performed. It is possible to inform the player of the number of suspensions of the variable performance to be by the jackpot notification image.

In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, the sound ramp control device 113 sends the values of each counter acquired based on the start winning to the first ball entrances from the main controller 110 by command. When it is determined to start the continuous notice performance when receiving, the continuous notice performance is executed over all the variable performances (suspended balls) suspended at that time regardless of the first ball entrance where the starting prize was awarded. may In addition, a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, and the variable performance for winning to one first ball entrance is preferentially executed over the variable performance for winning to other first ball entrances. In the pachinko machine, the start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the result of reading the counter value obtained for the winning in the first ball entrance where the variable effect is preferentially executed. . As a result, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance with the low priority, and the continuous announcement performance is not started for this variable performance. . Supposing that the continuous advance notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning to the first ball entrance with the low priority, and the variable effect is continuously suspended for the first ball entrance with the high priority, There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the continuous advance notice effect does not end easily. On the other hand, in this modified example, it is not determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is set to be executed for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the first ball entrance with the low priority. Since the continuous advance notice effect is not started, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received in the voice ramp control device 113, the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S1108 in FIG. 24). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number of held balls of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command set by the variation start process (S307) A pending ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a (see S305 in FIG. 16) is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the pending ball number command is a variation pattern. It may be transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 together with the transmission of the command. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 . In this case, S1108 in FIG. 24 is omitted. Also, the variation pattern command may include the value (N) of the pending ball number counter 203a after the subtraction. In this case, when receiving the variation pattern command, the sound lamp control device 112 may extract the number of pending balls (N) included in the variation pattern command and set it in the pending ball number counter 223a.

In the above embodiment, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passage through the second ball entrance 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. Alternatively, all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

Acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is established, determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information displayed on display means based on the determination result of the determination means dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined In a gaming machine that provides the gaming value of
a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit at least until the information is used for determination by the determination means;
determining whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means; judgment means for judging,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a detection means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
a notifying means for notifying based on the determination result of the determining means when the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means. .

According to the gaming machine A1, information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for determination by the determination means. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, the information obtained by the obtaining means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, Execution of the dynamic display of identification information based on that information is suspended. Here, the predetermined identification information is present in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is pending. A determination means determines whether there is a dynamic display of identifying information to be issued. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the notification means makes a notification based on the determination result of the determination means. Accordingly, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means. It can be grasped whether there is a dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily determine whether or not the game can be immediately stopped when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the business.

In gaming machine A1,
The determination means selects between dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means and dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, not only the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, but also the dynamic display execution means Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, including the dynamic display of the identification information in the determination means, is determined by the determination means, and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. When the detection means detects that the event has occurred, the notification means makes a notification based on the determination result of the determination means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means, not only the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended but also the dynamic Including the display, it is possible to grasp whether there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, if it is understood by the notification by the notification means that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears among the dynamic displays of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information being executed Since the predetermined identification information does not appear even in the display, there is an effect that the player can immediately make a decision to move to an action such as leaving the seat or completing the business.

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
The determination means determines whether or not dynamic display of the identification information is executed based on the information stored in the storage means until the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. It is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of identification information in which the number of suspensions, which is the number of display executions, is a predetermined number or less. A gaming machine A3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the dynamic display of the other identification information is executed before the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. The determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of identification information in which the number of times of holding, which is the number of holdings, is equal to or less than a predetermined number. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means makes a notification based on the determination result of the determination means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the dynamic display of the identification information whose number of times of suspension is equal to or less than a predetermined number based on the notification by the notification means, that is, the identification information that can be executed immediately In the dynamic display of , it can be grasped whether or not the predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, when the player can leave the seat in a short time, or when the player can finish the task immediately, the player can easily decide whether or not to stop the game and leave the seat or finish the task. There is an effect that it can be judged.

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
The determination means determines that the predetermined identification information appears before a first time elapses in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it determines whether or not there is dynamic display of identification information.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the dynamic display of identification information executed based on each piece of information stored in the storage means, the dynamic display of identification information in which predetermined identification information appears before the first time elapses It is determined by the determining means whether or not there is Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means makes a notification based on the determination result of the determination means. Accordingly, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information until the first time elapses based on the notification by the notification means. It is possible to grasp whether or not Therefore, if the player is able to leave the seat within the first time, or if the task can be completed within the first time, whether or not it is acceptable to stop the game and leave the seat or complete the task is determined. There is an effect that the player can easily judge.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A4,
The notifying means is adapted to dynamically display the identification information by the determination means when the detection means detects that the operation means has been operated in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that the first notification is made based on the fact that it is determined that there is.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are provided. That is, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the determination means determines that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on this, the first notification is made by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means and the first notification is made, it is immediately recognized that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, there is an effect that a decision to continue the game can be made immediately until the predetermined identification information appears.

In the gaming machine A5,
The game machine A6 is characterized in that the first notification made by the notification means notifies at least in which dynamic display of the identification information the predetermined identification information appears.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, when the first notification is made, at least in which dynamic display of the identification information the predetermined identification information appears is notified by the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine whether or not he/she can leave the seat or complete the task before the dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears is executed. be.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A6,
The notifying means is adapted to dynamically display the identification information by the determination means when the detection means detects that the operation means has been operated in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the second notification is made based on the determination that there is no.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are provided. That is, when the detection means detects that the operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the determination means determines that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on this, the second notification is performed by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means, if the second notification is made, it is immediately recognized that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Since it can be done, there is an effect that it is possible to immediately make a decision to stop the game and leave the seat or finish the business. On the other hand, even if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means, if the second notification is not sent to the notification means, the player is given a sense of expectation that the predetermined identification information may appear. There is an effect that the player can make a decision to continue the game while holding the player.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7,
The game machine A8 is characterized in that the detection means detects whether or not the operation to the operation means has been continuously performed for a second time or longer as the predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the player continues to operate the operation means for the second time or more, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detection means, and the notification means notifies based on the determination result of the determination means. done. When the operation means is continuously operated for the second time or more, it can be determined that it is performed based on the intention of the player, while the time during which the operation means is continuously operated is less than the second time. In this case, it can be determined that the player has unintentionally operated the operating means. In the game machine A8, when the player unintentionally operates the operation means, the player will know whether or not the predetermined identification information will be displayed. There is an effect that it can be suppressed, and it is possible to suppress deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7,
The game machine A9 is characterized in that the detection means detects whether or not the operation to the operation means has been performed a predetermined number of times within a third time as the predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the player performs an operation on the operation means for a predetermined number of times within the third time period, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detection means, and notification is made by the notification means based on the determination result of the determination means. will be If the operation means is operated a predetermined number of times within the third time, it can be determined that it was performed based on the intention of the player. It can be determined that the person has unintentionally operated the operating means. In the game machine A9, when the player unintentionally operates the operating means, the player will know whether or not the predetermined identification information will be displayed. There is an effect that it can be suppressed, and it is possible to suppress deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9,
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed with respect to the operation means, the notification means is configured to perform the operation based on the determination result of the determination means until the operation of the operation means is completed. The game machine A10 is characterized in that it is a machine that notifies.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A9, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the operation on the operation means ends. Until then, notification is made by the notification means based on the determination result of the determination means. Thus, when the operation of the operating means ends, the notification also ends. Therefore, when the player grasps the result of determination by the determining means based on the notification, the player ends the operation of the operating means, thereby ending the notification by the reporting means. can be made Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the notification by the notification means from being performed more than necessary, it is possible for a person other than the player to grasp whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. has the effect of suppressing

Acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is established, determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information displayed on display means based on the determination result of the determination means dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined In a gaming machine that provides the gaming value of
a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit at least until the information is used for determination by the determination means;
calculating means for calculating execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a detection means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
a notifying means for notifying the execution time calculated by the calculating means when the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means. B1.

According to the gaming machine B1, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for determination by the determination means. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, the information obtained by the obtaining means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, Execution of the dynamic display of identification information based on that information is suspended. Here, each execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is pending is calculated by the calculation means. be. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means. Accordingly, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, it is possible to grasp each execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means. Therefore, when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the task, if there is a dynamic display of the identification information that takes a long time to execute, the game is stopped and the player leaves the seat while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. There is an effect that the player can easily make a decision to finish the task.

In gaming machine B1,
The calculation means calculates the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means and the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. Calculate the remaining execution time until the execution of the display is finished, and
The notifying means calculates the execution time calculated by the calculating means and the remaining execution time as an execution time left when the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means. A game machine B2 characterized in that it notifies

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, not only the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, but also the dynamic display execution The remaining execution time until the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the means is completed is calculated by the calculation means, and the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended calculated by the calculation means and the remaining execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. , is reported by the reporting means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, not only the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended but also the identification information being executed is displayed based on the notification by the notification means. The player can also grasp the remaining fluctuation time of the dynamic display of . Therefore, when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the task, if the remaining execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed is long, the player immediately stops the game and tries to leave the seat or finish the task. There is an effect that the player can easily make a decision.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
determining whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means; Equipped with judgment means to judge,
The notifying means, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears by the determination means. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that the execution time calculated by the calculating means is notified based on the fact that it is determined to be present.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, in the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended. A determination means determines whether there is a dynamic display of identification information to be displayed. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on the determination by the determination means, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means, when the execution time is notified, it is immediately recognized that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Since it is possible, the player decides to continue the game until the specified identification information appears, or decides to leave or complete the task before the specified identification information appears based on the notified execution time. Also, if there is no notification, it is possible to immediately make a decision to leave the seat or finish the business immediately after the execution of the suspended dynamic display of the identification information is started.

In gaming machine B3,
The determination means selects between dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means and dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, not only the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, but also the dynamic display execution means. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, including the dynamic display of the identification information in the determination means, is determined by the determination means, and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. The execution time calculated by the calculating means is determined based on the determination by the determining means that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears when the detecting means detects that the It is reported by the reporting means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means, not only the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended but also the dynamic Including the display, it is possible to grasp whether there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, if it is understood by the notification by the notification means that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears among the dynamic displays of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information being executed Since the predetermined identification information does not appear even in the display, there is an effect that the player can immediately make a decision to move to an action such as leaving the seat or completing the business.

In game machine B3 or B4,
The determination means determines whether or not dynamic display of the identification information is executed based on the information stored in the storage means until the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. It is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of identification information in which the number of suspensions, which is the number of display executions, is a predetermined number or less. A gaming machine B5 characterized by:

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3 or B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the dynamic display of the other identification information is executed before the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. The determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of identification information in which the number of times of holding, which is the number of holdings, is equal to or less than a predetermined number. When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the determination means determines that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on this, the notifying means notifies the execution time calculated by the calculating means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the dynamic display of the identification information whose number of times of suspension is equal to or less than a predetermined number based on the notification by the notification means, that is, the identification information that can be executed immediately In the dynamic display of , it can be grasped whether or not the predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, when the player can leave the seat in a short time, or when the player can finish the task immediately, the player can easily decide whether or not to stop the game and leave the seat or finish the task. There is an effect that it can be judged.

In game machine B3 or B4,
The determination means determines that the predetermined identification information appears before a first time elapses in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that it determines whether or not there is dynamic display of identification information.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3 or B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the dynamic display of identification information executed based on each piece of information stored in the storage means, the dynamic display of identification information in which predetermined identification information appears before the first time elapses It is determined by the determining means whether or not there is When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the determination means determines that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on this, the notifying means notifies the execution time calculated by the calculating means. Accordingly, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information until the first time elapses based on the notification by the notification means. It is possible to grasp whether or not Therefore, if the player is able to leave the seat within the first time, or if the task can be completed within the first time, whether or not it is acceptable to stop the game and leave the seat or complete the task is determined. There is an effect that the player can easily judge.

In any of game machines B3 to B6,
The game machine B7 is characterized in that the notifying means notifies at least in which dynamic display of the identification information the predetermined identification information appears, together with the notification of the execution time.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the execution time is reported by the reporting means, at least in which dynamic display of the identification information the predetermined identification information appears is also reported. As a result, when the execution time is notified, the player can grasp in which dynamic display of the identification information the predetermined identification information appears, so that the predetermined identification information appears. It is possible to easily grasp the time until Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine whether or not it is possible to leave the seat or complete the task before the dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears is executed. .

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B7,
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notifying means, when there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, A game machine B8, characterized in that it informs the execution time calculated by the calculation means of the dynamic display of identification information until predetermined identification information appears.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, the predetermined identification information is displayed. The notification means notifies the execution time calculated by the calculation means for the dynamic display of the identification information until the identification information is issued. As a result, in the notification by the notification means, the player can easily grasp the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information until the predetermined identification information appears, so that the predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that the player can easily decide whether to stop the game and leave the seat or finish the business by the end of the game.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B8,
The predetermined start condition is established when a game medium shot into a predetermined game area wins a prize or passes through an operation opening disposed at a predetermined position in the game area,
The game machine comprises stop state determination means for determining whether or not the shooting of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped,
The notification means stops the ejection of the game medium to the predetermined game area by the stop state determination means when the detection means detects that the operation means is operated in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine B9, characterized in that the execution time calculated by the calculating means is notified on condition that it is determined to be in the state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state where the game machine is in a state where the game machine B9 is running.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined starting condition is established when a game medium shot into a predetermined game area wins a prize or passes through an operation opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, The stop state determination means determines whether or not the shooting of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped. When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the stop state determination means stops the ejection of the game medium to the predetermined game area. The execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means on the condition that it is determined to be in the state of When the execution time of dynamic display of identification information is determined according to the number of dynamic display of identification information whose execution is suspended in the storage means when the execution of dynamic display of the identification information is started There is If the ejection of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped, even in such a case, the execution time of the pending dynamic display of the identification information can be accurately calculated. By notifying the player of the execution time calculated by the calculation means on the condition that it is determined that the game medium is in a stopped state, the player can grasp the correct execution time. can. Therefore, when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the task, if there is a dynamic display of the identification information that takes a long time to execute, the game is stopped and the player leaves the seat while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. There is an effect that the player can make a decision to complete the task based on the accurate execution time.

In gaming machine B9,
The notification means stops the ejection of the game medium to the predetermined game area by the stop state determination means when the detection means detects that the operation means is operated in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that, when it is determined that the game machine is not in the state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state where the execution time has been calculated by the calculating means, the execution time calculated by the calculating means is notified as a reference value.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, when the detection means detects that the operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the stop state determination means determines that the game medium is not in a stopped state in the predetermined game area. Sometimes, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means as a reference value. As a result, when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the task, the player can perform a predetermined operation on the operating means even when the shooting of the game medium to the predetermined game area is not stopped. Since the execution time of the dynamic display of identification information is reported as a reference value, based on the reference value, if there is a dynamic display of identification information with a long execution time, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. There is an effect that the player can decide whether to stop the game and leave the seat or finish the business while the game is being played.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B10,
The game machine B11 is characterized in that the detection means detects whether or not the operation to the operation means has been continuously performed for a second time or longer as the predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the player continues to operate the operation means for the second time or more, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detection means, and the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means. be done. When the operation means is continuously operated for the second time or more, it can be determined that it is performed based on the intention of the player, while the time during which the operation means is continuously operated is less than the second time. In this case, it can be determined that the player has unintentionally operated the operating means. In the gaming machine B11, when the player unintentionally operates the operation means, the player can be prevented from knowing the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information by reporting, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B10,
The game machine B12 is characterized in that the detection means detects whether or not an operation to the operation means has been performed a predetermined number of times within a third time as the predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the player performs an operation on the operating means a predetermined number of times within the third time period, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detecting means, and the execution time calculated by the calculating means is notified by the reporting means. be. If the operation means is operated a predetermined number of times within the third time, it can be determined that it was performed based on the intention of the player. It can be determined that the person has unintentionally operated the operating means. In the gaming machine B12, when the player unintentionally operates the operation means, the player can be prevented from knowing the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information by reporting, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B12,
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the informing means keeps the execution time calculated by the calculation means until the operation on the operation means ends. A game machine B13 characterized in that it notifies the time.

According to the game machine B13, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B12, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the operation on the operation means ends. Until then, the execution time calculated by the calculating means is notified. As a result, when the operation of the operation means ends, the notification also ends. Therefore, when the player grasps the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the notification, by ending the operation of the operation means, the notification means can be terminated. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the notification by the notification means from being performed more than necessary, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information from being grasped by a person other than the player.

Acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is established, determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information displayed on display means based on the determination result of the determination means dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined In a gaming machine that provides the gaming value of
a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit at least until the information is used for determination by the determination means;
calculation means for calculating the time until the predetermined identification information appears based on the information stored in the storage means;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a detection means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
notification means for notifying the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C1, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for determination by the determination means. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, the information obtained by the obtaining means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, Execution of the dynamic display of identification information based on that information is suspended. Here, based on each piece of information stored in the storage means, the time required for the predetermined identification information to appear is calculated by the calculation means. Then, the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player. is reported by the reporting means. Thus, by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means, the player can grasp the time until the predetermined identification information appears based on the notification by the notification means. Therefore, when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the task, the player can decide to stop the game and leave the seat or finish the task before the predetermined identification information appears. It has the effect of making it easier.

In gaming machine C1,
determining whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means; Equipped with judgment means to judge,
The notifying means, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears by the determination means. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the notification is not executed when it is determined that there is no notification.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, in the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended. A determination means determines whether there is a dynamic display of identification information to be displayed. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, if there is no dynamic display of the identification information, the predetermined identification information is displayed. When determined by the determination means, the notification by the notification means is not executed. As a result, even if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the identification information that the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended if there is no notification. It can be understood that there is no dynamic display. Therefore, in this case, the player can easily determine that he/she can stop the game and leave the seat or complete the business at least when the execution of the dynamic display of the pending identification information is started. effective.

In gaming machine C2,
The determination means selects between dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means and dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, not only the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, but also the dynamic display execution means. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, including the dynamic display of the identification information in the determination means, is determined by the determination means, and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. If the detection means detects that the identification information is not displayed dynamically and the determination means determines that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, the notification by the notification means is not executed. As a result, even if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, if there is no notification, not only the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended but also the dynamic display of the identification information that is being executed It can be understood that there is no dynamic display of identification information in which predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, in this case, there is an effect that the player can easily decide that he/she can immediately stop the game and leave the seat or finish the business.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C3,
The predetermined start condition is established when a game medium shot into a predetermined game area wins a prize or passes through an operation opening disposed at a predetermined position in the game area,
The game machine comprises stop state determination means for determining whether or not the shooting of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped,
The notification means stops the ejection of the game medium to the predetermined game area by the stop state determination means when the detection means detects that the operation means is operated in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculating means appears is reported under the condition that the game machine C2 is determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in a state where the predetermined identification information is calculated.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined starting condition is established when a game medium shot into a predetermined game area wins a prize or passes through an operation opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, The stop state determination means determines whether or not the shooting of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped. When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the stop state determination means stops the ejection of the game medium to the predetermined game area. On the condition that it is determined to be in the state of being in a state where the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears, the notification means notifies the time until the predetermined identification information appears. When the execution time of dynamic display of identification information is determined according to the number of dynamic display of identification information whose execution is suspended in the storage means when the execution of dynamic display of the identification information is started There is If the ejection of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped, even in such a case, the execution time of the pending dynamic display of the identification information can be accurately calculated. It is more accurate than reporting the time until the predetermined identification information appears, which is calculated by the calculation means on the condition that it is determined that the shooting of the game medium to the area is stopped. It is possible to make the player grasp such time. Therefore, when the player wants to leave the seat or complete the task, the decision to stop the game and leave the seat or complete the task can be made at an accurate time until the predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that the player can be made based on the

In gaming machine C4,
The notification means stops the ejection of the game medium to the predetermined game area by the stop state determination means when the detection means detects that the operation means is operated in a predetermined manner. The game machine C5 is characterized in that, when it is determined that the player is not in the state of not being in the state of being held, the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculating means appears is reported as a reference value.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the detection means detects that the operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the stop state determination means determines that the game medium is not in a stopped state in the predetermined game area. Sometimes, the time until the predetermined identification information appears, which is calculated by the calculation means, is notified by the notification means as a reference value. As a result, when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the task, the player can perform a predetermined operation on the operating means even when the shooting of the game medium to the predetermined game area is not stopped. Since the time until the predetermined identification information appears as a reference value, based on the reference value, it is possible to stop the game, leave the seat, or use the machine until the predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that the player can make a decision to settle the matter.

In any one of gaming machines C1 to C5,
The game machine C6 is characterized in that the detection means detects whether or not the operation to the operation means has been continuously performed for a second time or longer as the predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the player continues to operate the operation means for the second time or more, the operation is detected as the predetermined operation by the detection means, and the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears. The notification means notifies the time until it is completed. When the operation means is continuously operated for the second time or more, it can be determined that it is performed based on the intention of the player, while the time during which the operation means is continuously operated is less than the second time. In this case, it can be determined that the player has unintentionally operated the operating means. In the game machine C6, when the player unintentionally operates the operation means, the player will be informed of the time until the predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that it can be suppressed, and it is possible to suppress deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In any one of gaming machines C1 to C5,
The game machine C7 is characterized in that the detection means detects whether or not an operation to the operation means has been performed a predetermined number of times within a third time as the predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the player performs an operation on the operating means a predetermined number of times within the third time period, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detecting means, and the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculating means is displayed. The time until is reported by the reporting means. If the operation means is operated a predetermined number of times within the third time, it can be determined that it was performed based on the intention of the player. It can be determined that the person has unintentionally operated the operating means. In the gaming machine C7, when the player unintentionally operates the operating means, the player will be notified of the time until the predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that it can be suppressed, and it is possible to suppress deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C7,
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means keeps the predetermined value calculated by the calculation means until the operation on the operation means ends. A gaming machine C8 characterized in that it notifies the time until the identification information of is displayed.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines C1 to C8, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the operation on the operation means ends. The time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears is notified. Thus, when the operation of the operating means ends, the notification also ends. Therefore, when the player grasps the time until the predetermined identification information appears based on the notification, the player can end the operation of the operating means. , the notification by the notification means can be terminated. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the notification by the notification means from being performed more than necessary, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the time until the predetermined identification information appears from being grasped by a person other than the player.

Acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is established, determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information displayed on display means based on the determination result of the determination means dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined In a gaming machine that provides the gaming value of
a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit at least until the information is used for determination by the determination means;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a detection means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
notification means for performing notification based on information stored in the storage means when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
When the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, non-execution of notifying by the notifying means even if a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means thereafter. A gaming machine D1 characterized by comprising means.

According to the gaming machine D1, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for determination by the determination means. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, the information obtained by the obtaining means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, Execution of the dynamic display of identification information based on that information is suspended. Here, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the notification means makes a notification based on the information stored in the storage means. . Accordingly, by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means, the player can grasp information regarding the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means. Therefore, when the player wants to leave the seat or complete the task, whether or not the game can be stopped immediately is determined based on the information related to the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, which is grasped based on the notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily make a decision. Further, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the non-execution means makes the notification by the notification means non-execution even if the predetermined operation is performed on the operation means thereafter. be. As a result, even if someone other than the player operates the operating means while the player is leaving the seat based on the notification, it is possible to prevent the result of the notification from being known to anyone other than the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interests of the original players can be protected.

In any one of game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8,
When the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, non-execution of notifying by the notifying means even if a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means thereafter. A gaming machine D2 characterized by comprising means.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, and C1 to C8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the non-execution means disables the notification by the notification means even if the predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. be. As a result, even if someone other than the player operates the operation means while the player leaves the seat based on the notification, it is possible to prevent the result of the notification from being known to anyone other than the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interests of the original players can be protected.

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
storage determination means for determining whether or not all information stored in the storage means has been used for determination by the determination means;
cancellation means for canceling the non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means when the storage judgment means judges that all the information stored in the storage means has been used for the judgment by the judgment means. A gaming machine D3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the storage determination means determines that all the information stored in the storage means has been used for the determination by the determination means, the non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means is canceled by the cancellation means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent anyone other than the player from grasping the result of notification until at least all the information stored in the storage means is used for determination by the determination means. Further, when all the information stored in the storage means is used for the determination by the determination means, it is assumed that the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution was suspended due to the game of the person who originally played the game has been once executed. Since it is conceivable, there is an effect that a person who has played the game after that can obtain a notification based on the operation by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means.

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
storage determination means for determining whether or not all information stored in the storage means used for notification by the notification means has been used for determination by the determination means;
When the storage determination means determines that all the information stored in the storage means used for the notification by the notification means has been used for the determination by the determination means, the notification by the non-executing means and a canceling means for canceling the non-execution of the game machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the storage determination means determines that all the information stored in the storage means used for the notification by the notification means has been used for the determination by the determination means, the non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means is canceled. released by means. As a result, at least until all the information stored in the storage means used for the notification by the notification means is used for the determination by the determination means, the result of notification cannot be grasped by a person other than the player. has the effect of being able to Further, when all the information stored in the storage means used for notification by the notification means is used for determination by the determination means, the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means again to cancel the previous notification. Since the information acquired after the information used for the purpose and stored in the storage means can be used to perform the notification by the notification means, the player has the effect of having many opportunities for notification. .

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
A game machine D5, further comprising: canceling means for canceling the non-execution of the notification by the non-executing means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the non-execution of the notification by the non-executing means is canceled by the canceling means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent anyone other than the player from grasping the result of the notification until at least a predetermined starting condition is established after the notification is not executed. Further, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the player can perform a predetermined operation on the operation means again, so that the judgment means can make a judgment using the information stored in the storage means after the judgment made by the judgment means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have many opportunities of notification based on the information newly acquired and stored in the storage means with the establishment of the predetermined start condition as a trigger.

In any one of gaming machines D1 to D5,
second canceling means for canceling the non-execution of the notification by the non-executing means, triggered by the appearance of predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means; A gaming machine D6 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the non-execution of the notification by the non-executing means is canceled by the second canceling means when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means. . The player may continue playing the game without leaving the seat or doing any business by receiving a notification based on a predetermined operation on the operating means. In some cases, the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended is left at the stage where the predetermined game value is awarded. By performing a predetermined operation on the operation means again, the player can cause the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended at the stage when the predetermined game value is awarded to be notified. Therefore, the player can determine again whether or not to immediately execute the action of leaving the seat or completing the task at that stage after the predetermined game value is awarded.

Acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is established, determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information displayed on display means based on the determination result of the determination means dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined In a gaming machine that provides the gaming value of
a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit at least until the information is used for determination by the determination means;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a detection means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
notification means for performing notification based on information stored in the storage means when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
receiving means for receiving input of second information given to the player;
an output means for outputting third information regarding a game state after the input is received by the receiving means based on an instruction from the player;
The notifying means detects that a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means by the detecting means during the period from when the input is received by the receiving means until the output is made by the output means. A game machine D7 characterized in that it notifies the user.

According to the gaming machine D7, information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for determination by the determination means. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, the information obtained by the obtaining means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, Execution of the dynamic display of identification information based on that information is suspended. Here, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the notification means makes a notification based on the information stored in the storage means. . Accordingly, by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means, the player can grasp information regarding the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means. Therefore, when the player wants to leave the seat or complete the task, whether or not the game can be stopped immediately is determined based on the information related to the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, which is grasped based on the notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily make a decision. Further, the input of the second information given to the player is received by the reception means, and the output means outputs the third information regarding the game state after the input is received by the reception means based on the instruction from the player. be. When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means during the period from when the input is received by the receiving means until the output is made by the output means, the notification means makes a notification. . As a result, the person who has input the second information provided to the player is notified by the notifying means by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means, and is caused to output the third information regarding the game state from the output means. For example, even if the person leaves the seat, there is an effect that other people cannot grasp the result of the notification by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means.

In any one of game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8,
receiving means for receiving input of second information given to the player;
an output means for outputting third information regarding a game state after the input is received by the receiving means based on an instruction from the player;
The notifying means detects that a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means by the detecting means during the period from when the input is received by the receiving means until the output is made by the output means. A game machine D8 characterized in that it notifies the user.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, and C1 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the input of the second information given to the player is received by the receiving means, and the output means outputs the third information regarding the game state after the input is received by the receiving means based on the instruction from the player. be. When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means during the period from when the input is received by the receiving means until the output is made by the output means, the notification means makes a notification. . As a result, the person who has input the second information provided to the player is notified by the notifying means by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means, and is caused to output the third information regarding the game state from the output means. For example, even if the person leaves the seat, there is an effect that other people cannot grasp the result of the notification by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means.

Acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is established, determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information displayed on display means based on the determination result of the determination means dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined In a gaming machine that provides the gaming value of
a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit at least until the information is used for determination by the determination means;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a detection means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
notification means for performing notification based on information stored in the storage means when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
a first receiving means for receiving input of fourth information from a player;
a second receiving means for receiving input of fifth information from the player;
The notifying means causes the detecting means to notify the operation means during a period from when the input of the fourth information is received by the first receiving means until when the input of the fifth information is received by the second receiving means. A game machine D9 characterized in that when it is detected that a predetermined operation has been performed on the game machine D9, a notification is given.

According to the game machine D9, information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for determination by the determination means. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, the information obtained by the obtaining means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, Execution of the dynamic display of identification information based on that information is suspended. Here, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the notification means makes a notification based on the information stored in the storage means. . Accordingly, by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means, the player can grasp information regarding the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means. Therefore, when the player wants to leave the seat or complete the task, whether or not the game can be stopped immediately is determined based on the information related to the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, which is grasped based on the notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily make a decision. Further, the input of the fourth information from the player is received by the first receiving means, and the input of the fifth information from the player is received by the second receiving means. A predetermined operation is performed on the operating means by the detecting means during the period from when the input of the fourth information is received by the first receiving means until when the input of the fifth information is received by the second receiving means. is detected, notification is made by the notification means. As a result, if a person who has input the fourth information is notified by the notification means by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means, and inputs the fifth information, even if that person leaves the seat, other people will be notified. However, there is an effect that it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the notification result by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means. Note that the fourth information and the fifth information may be the same or different.

In any one of game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8,
a first receiving means for receiving input of fourth information from a player;
a second receiving means for receiving input of fifth information from the player;
The notifying means causes the detecting means to notify the operation means during a period from when the input of the fourth information is received by the first receiving means until when the input of the fifth information is received by the second receiving means. A game machine D10, characterized in that it notifies when it is detected that a predetermined operation has been performed.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, and C1 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the input of the fourth information from the player is received by the first receiving means, and the input of the fifth information from the player is received by the second receiving means. A predetermined operation is performed on the operating means by the detecting means during the period from when the input of the fourth information is received by the first receiving means until when the input of the fifth information is received by the second receiving means. is detected, notification is made by the notification means. As a result, if a person who has input the fourth information is notified by the notification means by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means, and inputs the fifth information, even if that person leaves the seat, other people will be notified. However, there is an effect that it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the notification result by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means. Note that the fourth information and the fifth information may be the same or different.

A gaming machine E1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8, and D1 to D10. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A game machine E2 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8, and D1 to D10, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A game machine E3 characterized in that, in any of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8, and D1 to D10, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

It should be noted that "entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined starting condition" in the claims, and "counters C1 to C3, The CS1 value” corresponds to the “information” acquired by the “acquisition means” in the claims, and the “third pattern” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” in the claims. However, the "variable effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "dynamic display of identification information" described in the claims, and the "jackpot design" described in the above embodiments corresponds to the claims. Corresponds to the "predetermined identification information", and the "jackpot" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined game value" described in the claims.
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning hole and a starting winning is detected while a variable display (variable effect) of symbols and the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , with a predetermined number as the upper limit, there is a variable effect related to the start winning is suspended. When the variable effect being executed ends, execution of the variable effect related to the starting prize detected first among the suspended non-executed variable effects is started (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340046).
In conventional gaming machines, when a player wants to stop the game and leave the seat, or when he/she wants to complete a task such as a call or e-mail on a mobile phone during the game, if the variable effect is suspended, Since there is a possibility that there is a winning variable effect among the suspended variable effects, it is difficult for the player to immediately stop the game and leave the seat, or to start something in the middle of the game. There is a problem.
This technical idea was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and provides a gaming machine that allows a player to easily determine whether or not the game should be stopped immediately. for the purpose.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
23 Notice button (operation means)
64 Actuation opening (1st ball entrance)
81 Third pattern display device (display means, part of notification means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display execution means, part of notification means)
223b Prefetch information storage area (storage means)
223h Notification button invalid flag (non-execution means)
S204 (acquisition means)
S307 Fluctuation start processing (determining means)
S1311 (detection means)
S1321 (stopped state determination means)
S1334 (judgment means)
S1335, S1336, S1337, S1340 (part of notification means)
S1338, S1339 (calculation means)
S1364 (storage determination means)
S1365 (Release means)

Claims (1)

Acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is established, determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information displayed on display means based on the determination result of the determination means dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined In a gaming machine that provides the gaming value of
a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit at least until the information is used for determination by the determination means;
determining whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means; judgment means for judging,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a detection means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
notification means capable of, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, based on the determination result of the determination means while the operation is being performed;
and means for changing a color displayed in a predetermined area of the display means as notification by the notification means executed at least while the operation is being performed .

Images